ML081370218: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 18: Line 18:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:OPL 171.036
{{#Wiki_filter:(7)
                                                                Revision 11
CASx (CASA or CASB) accident signal
                                                                Page 24 of 58
(after 5 second delay via BBRX relay)
              (7)   CASx (CASA or CASB) accident signal         -122" RxVL OR
OPL171.036
                      (after 5 second delay via BBRX relay)       2.45 DWP AND
Revision 11
                                                                  < 450# RPV
Page 24 of 58
I. 4kV Shutdown Boards (Normal Power Seeking)                   Refer to prints
-122" RxVL OR
                                                                15E-500 series Key
2.45 DWP AND
                                                                Diagram of STDBY
< 450# RPV
                                                                Aux. Power System
I.
  1.    Power sources                                           Obj. V.B.6.c
4kV Shutdown Boards
                                                                  Obj. V.C.1.c
(Normal Power Seeking)
        a.    4kV supplies to each U1/2 Shutdown Board:
1.
                                                                  Obj. V.D.6.c
Power sources
              are as follows:
a.
              Board       NORMAL Supply
4kV supplies to each U1/2 Shutdown Board:
                A         Shutdown Bus 1
are as follows:
                B         Shutdown Bus 1
Board
                C         Shutdown Bus 2
NORMAL Supply
                D         Shutdown Bus 2
A
              The first alternate is from the other Shutdown     SBO
Shutdown Bus 1
              Bus. The second alternate is from the diesel
B
                                                                  3    % via bustie
Shutdown Bus 1
              generator. The third alternate is from the U3
C
                                                                        board
Shutdown Bus 2
              diesel generators via a U3 Shutdown Board.
D
                                                                  % % via other
Shutdown Bus 2
                                                                  SO Bus
The first alternate is from the other Shutdown
        b.   There are two possible 4kV supplies to each
Bus. The second alternate is from the diesel
              U3 Shutdown Board:
generator. The third alternate is from the U3
              Board       NORMAL Supply
diesel generators via a U3 Shutdown Board.
                3EA       Unit Board 3A
b.
                3EB       Unit Board 3A
There are two possible 4kV supplies to each
                3EC       Unit Board 3B
U3 Shutdown Board:
                3ED       Unit Board 3B
Board
              (1)   The first alternate is from the diesel
NORMAL Supply
                      generators. The U1/2 diesel
3EA
                      generators cannot supply power to the
Unit Board 3A
                      U3 Shutdown Boards alone. They
3EB
                      may, however, be paralleled with the
Unit Board 3A
                      U3 diesel generators for backfeed
3EC
                      operation. The tie breaker off the unit 3
Unit Board 3B
                      Shutdown Board is interlocked as
3ED
                      follows:
Unit Board 3B
(1)
The first alternate is from the diesel
generators. The U1/2 diesel
generators cannot supply power to the
U3 Shutdown Boards alone. They
may, however, be paralleled with the
U3 diesel generators for backfeed
operation. The tie breaker off the unit 3
Shutdown Board is interlocked as
follows:
Refer to prints
15E-500 series Key
Diagram of STDBY
Aux. Power System
Obj. V.B.6.c
Obj. V.C.1.c
Obj. V.D.6.c
SBO
3
% via bustie
board
%
% via other
SO Bus


                                                              OPL171.036
7.
                                                              Revision 11
Shutdown Board Transfer Scheme
                                                              Page 31 of 58
a.
  7. Shutdown Board Transfer Scheme
The only automatic transfer of power on a
    a.   The only automatic transfer of power on a             Obj. V.B.8.c
shutdown board is a delayed (slow) transfer.
          shutdown board is a delayed (slow) transfer.         Obj. V.C.2.c
In order for the transfer to take place, the bus
          In order for the transfer to take place, the bus     Obj. V.D.8.c
transfer control switch (43Sx) must be in
          transfer control switch (43Sx) must be in             Procedural
AUTOMATIC.
          AUTOMATIC.                                           Adherence when
OPL171.036
                                                                transferring
Revision 11
                                                                boards
Page 31 of 58
          (1)    Undervoltage is sensed on the line
Obj. V.B.8.c
                  side of the normal feeder breaker.
Obj. V.C.2.c
          (2)    Voltage is available on the line side of
Obj. V.D.8.c
                  the alternate feeder breaker.
Procedural
          (3)    The normal feeder breaker then
Adherence when
                  receives a trip signal.
transferring
          (4)    A 52b contact on the normal supply
boards
                  breaker shuts in the close circuit of
                  the alternate feeder breaker,
                  indicating that the normal breaker is
                  open.
          (5)    A residual voltage relay shuts in the
                  close circuit of the alternate supply
                  breaker, indicating that ooara voltage
                  bas decayed to less than 30 percent
                  of normal.
          (6)    The alternate supply breaker then
                  closes.
                  The shutdown board transfer scheme is
                  NORMAL seeking. If power is restored
                  to the line side of the normal feeder
                  breaker, and if the 43Sx switch is still in
                  AUTOMATIC, then a "slow" transfer
                  back to the normal supply will occur.
                  This will cause momentary power loss
                  to loads on the bus and ESF actuations
                  are possible.
    **b  Manual High Speed (Fast Transfer)                    Obj. V.B.8.c
                                                                Obj. V.C.2.c
          To fast transfer a shutdown board perform the        Review INPO
          following:                                            SOER 83-06
(
(
**b
(1)
Undervoltage is sensed on the line
side of the normal feeder breaker.
(2)
Voltage is available on the line side of
the alternate feeder breaker.
(3)
The normal feeder breaker then
receives a trip signal.
(4)
A 52b contact on the normal supply
breaker shuts in the close circuit of
the alternate feeder breaker,
indicating that the normal breaker is
open.
(5)
A residual voltage relay shuts in the
close circuit of the alternate supply
breaker, indicating that ooara voltage
bas decayed to less than 30 percent
of normal.
(6)
The alternate supply breaker then
closes.
The shutdown board transfer scheme is
NORMAL seeking. If power is restored
to the line side of the normal feeder
breaker, and if the 43Sx switch is still in
AUTOMATIC, then a "slow" transfer
back to the normal supply will occur.
This will cause momentary power loss
to loads on the bus and ESF actuations
are possible.
Manual High Speed (Fast Transfer)
To fast transfer a shutdown board perform the
following:
Obj. V.B.8.c
Obj. V.C.2.c
Review INPO
SOER 83-06


                                                  OPL 171.036
OPL171.036
                                                  Revision 11
Revision 11
                                                  Page 32 of 58
Page 32 of 58
(   (1)   Ensure voltage is available from the     Procedural
(
            alternate source.                         Adherence
(1)
    (2)   Place 43Sx switch to MANUAL.
Ensure voltage is available from the
    (3)   Place alternate breaker SYNC switch       Self Check
Procedural
            to ON.
alternate source.
    (4)   Place alternate supply breaker switch
Adherence
            in CLOSE.
(2)
    (5)   Place normal supply breaker switch in
Place 43Sx switch to MANUAL.
            TRIP.
(3)
    (6)   Alternate breaker closes when 52b         Alternate supply is
Place alternate breaker SYNC switch
            contact from normal breaker closes,       not a qualified Off-
Self Check
            indicating that breaker has opened. If   site supply
to ON.
            the Alternate Supply from SO Bus is
(4)
            closed to a Unit 1/2 SID Board, an
Place alternate supply breaker switch
            Accident Signal will trip it open.
in CLOSE.
    (7)   Turn off SYNC switch.
(5)
    (8)   DO NOT place 43Sx switch back to
Place normal supply breaker switch in
            AUTOMATIC (Transfer back to
TRIP.
            normal supply would occur).
(6)
    Note: If the SYNC SW was not ON for             Self Check
Alternate breaker closes when 52b
            the alternate breaker, a delayed
Alternate supply is
            transfer would occur when the
contact from normal breaker closes,
            normal breaker opens and the
not a qualified Off-
            board residual voltage relay
indicating that breaker has opened. If
            detects less than 30% voltage,
site supply
            assuming the alternate breaker's
the Alternate Supply from SO Bus is
            control switch is held in the
closed to a Unit 1/2 SID Board, an
            CLOSE position.
Accident Signal will trip it open.
  c. Conditions which automatically trip the board
(7)
    transfer control switch (43Sx) to MANUAL:
Turn off SYNC switch.
    (1 )   Normal Feeder Lockout Relay (86-xxx)
(8)
    (2)   Alternate Feeder Lockout Relay (86-
DO NOT place 43Sx switch back to
          ,xxx)
AUTOMATIC (Transfer back to
    (3)   Normal Feeder Control Transfer Switch
normal supply would occur).
            in EMERGENCY
Note: If the SYNC SW was not ON for
    (4)   Alternate Feeder Control Transfer       -122" RxVL
Self Check
            Switch in EMERGENCY                           OR
the alternate breaker, a delayed
                                                    2.45 DWP AND
transfer would occur when the
    (5)   CASx accident signal
normal breaker opens and the
(                                                    < 450# RPV
board residual voltage relay
detects less than 30% voltage,
assuming the alternate breaker's
control switch is held in the
CLOSE position.
c.
Conditions which automatically trip the board
transfer control switch (43Sx) to MANUAL:
(1 )
Normal Feeder Lockout Relay (86-xxx)
(2)
Alternate Feeder Lockout Relay (86-
,xxx)
(3)
Normal Feeder Control Transfer Switch
in EMERGENCY
(4)
Alternate Feeder Control Transfer
-122" RxVL
Switch in EMERGENCY
OR
(
(5)
CASx accident signal
2.45 DWP AND
< 450# RPV


                                  -----
    20. RO 262002Al.02 OO l/C/Am/GI/UNIT PREFFERRED/C/A 2.5/2.9/262002AA l.02/BF0530I/RO/SRO/lO/27/2007
        Given the following plant conditions:
                *    Unit 3 is in a normal lineup .
( .
( .
                *   The following alarm is received :
-----
                      - UNIT PFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL
20. RO 262002Al.02 OO l/C/Am/GI/UNIT PREFFERRED/C/A 2.5/2.9/262002AA l.02/BF0530I/RO/SRO/lO/27/2007
                *   It is determined that the alarm is due to the Unit-3 Unit Preferred AC Generator Overvoltage
Given the following plant conditions:
                      condition
*
        Wh ich ONE of the following describes the correct result of this condition? Assume NO Operator actions.
Unit 3 is in a normal lineup.
        A. Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.
*
        B.   Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open ; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.
The following alarm is received :
        C~ Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open ; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set continues to run without
- UNIT PFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL
            excitation.
*
        D. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open ; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set cont inues to run without
It is determined that the alarm is due to the Unit-3 Unit Preferred AC Generator Overvoltage
            excitation .
condition
        KIA Statement:
Which ONE of the following describes the correct result of this condition? Assume NO Operator actions.
        262002 UPS (AC/DC)
A.
        KIA: A1.02 Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the
Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.
        UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (A.C./D.C.) controls including: Motor generator outputs .
B. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.
        KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to correctly apply
C~ Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set continues to run without
        a specific operating condition of the UPS MMG Set to the correct response of the system to that condition.
excitation.
        References: OPL171 .102, Rev.6, pg 20 & 21, 3-ARP-9-8B, Rev.9, tile 35
D. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set continues to run without
        Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
excitation.
        sort, and integrate the parts of the question to solve a problem . This requires mentally using this
KIA Statement:
        knowledge and its meaning to resolve the problem .
262002 UPS (AC/DC)
        0610 NRC Exam
KIA: A1.02 Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (A.C./D.C.) controls including: Motor generator outputs.
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to correctly apply
a specific operating condition of the UPS MMG Set to the correct response of the system to that condition.
References: OPL171 .102, Rev.6, pg 20 & 21, 3-ARP-9-8B, Rev.9, tile 35
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to solve a problem. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to resolve the problem .
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
  Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
(
  1. The 1001 and 1003 breakers from an MMG set will trip on overvoltage or underfrequency at the output
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
      of the MMG.
1. The 1001 and 1003 breakers from an MMG set will trip on overvoltage or underfrequency at the output
  2. Unit 2 MMG Breakers are interlocked to prevent alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at the same time.
of the MMG.
  3. When an overvoltage condition exists at the Generator Output, the 1001 breaker from the MMG Set
2. Unit 2 MMG Breakers are interlocked to prevent alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at the same time.
      trips.
3. When an overvoltage condition exists at the Generator Output, the 1001 breaker from the MMG Set
  4. Excitation is lost and the MMG Set continues to run.
trips.
  5. The Hold to build up voltage switch must be depressed to restore voltage.Also
4. Excitation is lost and the MMG Set continues to run.
  A is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible because the breaker
5. The Hold to build up voltage switch must be depressed to restore voltage.Also
  lineup is correct.
A is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible because the breaker
  B is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible although the breaker
lineup is correct.
  lineup is backwards.
B is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible although the breaker
  C is correct.
lineup is backwards.
  D is incorrect. The breaker lineup is backwards. This is plausible because the MMG Set will continue to
C is correct.
  run without excitation.
D is incorrect. The breaker lineup is backwards. This is plausible because the MMG Set will continue to
run without excitation.
(
(


          BFN                           Panel 1-9-8                   1-ARP-9-8B
(
        Unit 1                        1-XA-55-8B                     Rev. 0009
BFN
(                                                                      Page 42 of 42
Unit 1
                                Senso rlTrip Point:
Panel 1-9-8
          UNIT PFD
1-XA-55-8B
          SUPPLY               Relay SE - loss of normal DC power source .
Senso rlTrip Point:
        ABNORMAL                Relay TS - DC Xfer switch transfers to Emergency DC Power Source.
1-ARP-9-8B
                                Regulating Transformer Common Alarm.
Rev. 0009
                                1-INV-252-001 , INVT-1 System Common Alarm .
Page 42 of 42
        (Page 1 of 1)
UNIT PFD
  Sensor          EL 593' 250V DC Battery Board 2
SUPPLY
  Location:
ABNORMAL
  Probable        A. Loss of normal DC power source
(Page 1 of 1)
  Cause:          B. DC power transfer.
Relay SE - loss of normal DC power source .
                  C. Relay failure
Relay TS - DC Xfer switch transfers to Emergency DC Power Source.
                  D. INVT-1 System Common Alarms
Regulating Transformer Common Alarm.
                      1. Fan Failure Rectifier
1-INV-252-001 , INVT-1 System Common Alarm .
                      2. Over temperature Rectifier
Sensor
                      3. AC Power Failure to Rectifier
Location:
                      4. Low DC Voltage
Probable
                      5. High DC Voltage
Cause:
                      6. Low DC Disconnect
EL 593' 250V DC Battery Board 2
                      7. Fan Failure Inverter
A.
                      8. Alternate Source Failure
Loss of normal DC power source
                      9. :Low AC Output Voltage
B. DC power transfer.
                      10. High Output Voltage
C. Relay failure
                      11. Inverter Fuse Blown
D. INVT-1 System Common Alarms
                      12. Static Switch Fuse Blown
1.
                      13. Over Temperature Inverter
Fan Failure Rectifier
                  E. PFD Regulating XFMR Common Alarms
2.
                      1. Transformer Over temperature
Over temperature Rectifier
                      2. Fan Failure
3.
                      3. CB1 Breaker Trip
AC Power Failure to Rectifier
                      4. CB2 Breaker Trip
4.
  Automatic      A. Auto transfer to DC Power Source on Rectifier failure .
Low DC Voltage
  Action:        B. Auto transfer to Alternate AC supply (Regulated Transformer) on Inverter failure.
5.
  Operator       A. IF 120V AC Unit Preferred is lost, THEN
High DC Voltage
  Action:            REFER TO 1-AOI-57-4 , Loss of Unit Preferred .                           o
6.
                  B. REFER TO appropriate portion of 0-OI-57C, 208V/120V AC
Low DC Disconnect
                      Electrical System.                                                       o
7.
  References:     0-45E641-2                     1-45E620-11                 1-3300D15A4585-1
Fan Failure Inverter
                  10-100467                    0-20-100756                  20-110437
8.
Alternate Source Failure
9.
:Low AC Output Voltage
10. High Output Voltage
11. Inverter Fuse Blown
12. Static Switch Fuse Blown
13. Over Temperature Inverter
E. PFD Regulating XFMR Common Alarms
1.
Transformer Over temperature
2.
Fan Failure
3.
CB1 Breaker Trip
4.
CB2 Breaker Trip
Auto transfer to DC Power Source on Rectifier failure .
Auto transfer to Alternate AC supply (Regulated Transformer) on Inverter failure.
Automatic
A.
Action:
B.
Operator
A.
Action:
B.
IF 120V AC Unit Preferred is lost, THEN
REFER TO 1-AOI-57-4, Loss of Unit Preferred .
REFER TO appropriate portion of 0-OI-57C, 208V/120V AC
Electrical System.
o
o
References:
0-45E641-2
10-100467
1-45E620-11
0-20-100756
1-3300D15A4585-1
20-110437


                                                OPL171.102
                                                Revision 6
                                                Page 20 of 69
(
(
        (d)   Another Unit's MMG set
b.
                The second alternate is from
(d)
                another unit's MMG set
Another Unit's MMG set
                output. Unit 2 MMG is the
The second alternate is from
                second alternate for either
another unit's MMG set
                Unit 1 or Unit 3; Unit 3 is the
output. Unit 2 MMG is the
                second alternate for Unit 2.
second alternate for either
                Transfers to this source are
Unit 1 or Unit 3; Unit 3 is the
                done manually at Battery
second alternate for Unit 2.
                Board 2 panel 11.
Transfers to this source are
  b. MMG Sets (Unit 2&3)                         Obj. V.B.2.b
done manually at Battery
                                                TP-11
Board 2 panel 11.
    (1) The MMG is normally driven By the     Obj'v.D.2.c
MMG Sets (Unit 2&3)
        AC motor, powered from 480V           Obj.V.D.2.d/j
(1)
        Shutdown Board A. Should this         Obj V.E.2.c
The MMG is normally driven By the
        supply fail, the AC motor is           Obj'v.E.2.d/i
AC motor, powered from 480V
        automatically disconnected and the     Obj V.B.2.h
Shutdown Board A. Should this
        DC motor starts, powered from         Obj'v.C.3.e
supply fail, the AC motor is
        250V Battery Board. The DC             Obj'v.D.2.j
automatically disconnected and the
        motor has an alternate power           Obj'v.E.2.i
DC motor starts, powered from
        supply from another 250V Battery
250V Battery Board. The DC
        Board. Transfer to the alternate
motor has an alternate power
        DC source is manual.
supply from another 250V Battery
        Underfrequency on the generator
Board. Transfer to the alternate
        output will trip the DC motor.
DC source is manual.
        Transfer of the MMG set back to
Underfrequency on the generator
        the AC motor is manual.
output will trip the DC motor.
    (2) The 1001 and 1003 breakers from
Transfer of the MMG set back to
        an MMG set will trip on overvoltage
the AC motor is manual.
        or underfrequency at the output of
(2)
        the MMG. Also Unit 2 MMG
The 1001 and 1003 breakers from
        Breakers are interlocked to prevent
an MMG set will trip on overvoltage
        alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at
or underfrequency at the output of
        the same time.
the MMG. Also Unit 2 MMG
Breakers are interlocked to prevent
alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at
the same time.
OPL171.102
Revision 6
Page 20 of 69
Obj. V.B.2.b
TP-11
Obj'v.D.2.c
Obj.V.D.2.d/j
Obj V.E.2.c
Obj'v.E.2.d/i
Obj V.B.2.h
Obj'v.C.3.e
Obj'v.D.2.j
Obj'v.E.2.i


                                        OPL171.102
(3)
                                        Revision 6
When an under frequency or
                                        Page 21 of 69
overvoltage condition exists at the
(3) When an under frequency or          Obj. V.B.2.h
Generator Output the following
    overvoltage condition exists at the Obj. V.C.3.e
occurs
    Generator Output the following      Obj. V.D.2.j
(a)
    occurs                              Obj. V.E.2.i
BB panel 10 breakers from
    (a)   BB panel 10 breakers from
the MMG Set trip.
          the MMG Set trip.
OPL171.102
    U2    1001 (U2)     1003 (U1&3)
Revision 6
    U3    1001 (U3)      1003 (U2)
Page 21 of 69
    (b)   Excitation is lost and the
Obj. V.B.2.h
          MMG Set continues to run.
Obj. V.C.3.e
          (The Hold to build up
Obj. V.D.2.j
          voltage switch must be
Obj. V.E.2.i
          depressed to restore
U2
          voltage.)
U3
1001 (U2)
1001 (U3)
1003 (U1&3)
1003 (U2)
(b)
Excitation is lost and the
MMG Set continues to run.
(The Hold to build up
voltage switch must be
depressed to restore
voltage.)


  21 . RO 263000KI .02 00 I/MEMlT2G I1250VDC/3/263000KI .02//RO/SROI
        Wh ich ONE of the following statements describes the operat ion of 250 VDC Battery Charger 2B?
(      A.      The normal power supply to Battery Charger 2B is 480V Common Board 1.
        8.    Battery Charger 2B can supply . directly from unit 2 Battery Board room, any of the six Unit & Plant
              250VDC battery boards.
      C.      Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying two Battery Boards simultaneously.
        0 . 01 Load shedding of the battery charger can be bypassed by placing the Emergency ON select
              switch in the Emergency ON Position.
      KIA Statement:
      263000 DC Electrical Distribution
      K1.02 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause - effect relationships between D.C.
      ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and the following : Battery charger and battery
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
      knowledge of battery charger operation.
      References : OPL 171.037
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requ irement to recall
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
      0610 NRC Exam
      REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
      Plausibility Analysis:
      In order to answer this question correctly the cand idate must determine the following:
      1. Normal and Alternate power to Battery Charger 2B.
      2. Loads capable of being supplied by Battery Charger 2B.
      3. Load Shedd ing logic and bypass capability.
      A is incorrect. This is plausible because 480V Common Board 1 is the Alternate supply to Battery
      Charger 2B.
      B is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying any of the six 250V
      Battery Boards, but NOT directly from Unit 2 Battery Board Room.
      C is incorrect. Th is is plaus ible because Battery Charger 2B is sufficiently large enough to support the
      loads , but mechanical interlocks prevent closing more than one output feeder breaker.
      D is correct.
(
(
(
21. RO 263000KI .02 00I/MEMlT2G I1250VDC/3/263000KI .02//RO/SROI
Wh ich ONE of the following statements describes the operation of 250 VDC Battery Charger 2B?
A.
The normal power supply to Battery Charger 2B is 480V Common Board 1.
8.
Battery Charger 2B can supply . directly from unit 2 Battery Board room, any of the six Unit & Plant
250VDC battery boards.
C.
Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying two Battery Boards simultaneously.
0 .01
Load shedding of the battery charger can be bypassed by placing the Emergency ON select
switch in the Emergency ON Position.
KIA Statement:
263000 DC Electrical Distribution
K1.02 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between D.C.
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and the following: Battery charger and battery
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of battery charger operation.
References:
OPL171.037
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Normal and Alternate power to Battery Charger 2B.
2. Loads capable of being supplied by Battery Charger 2B.
3. Load Shedding logic and bypass capability.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because 480V Common Board 1 is the Alternate supply to Battery
Charger 2B.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying any of the six 250V
Battery Boards, but NOT directly from Unit 2 Battery Board Room.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is sufficiently large enough to support the
loads, but mechanical interlocks prevent closing more than one output feeder breaker.
D is correct.


                                                                            OPL 171.037
(
                                                                            Revision 10
(2)
                                                                            Page 11 of 70
The Plant/Station Batteries (4, 5, and 6) are
              (2) The Plant/Station Batteries (4, 5, and 6) are     Obj V.B.1
Class Non-1E and are utilized primarily for U-2,
(                  Class Non-1 E and are utilized primarily for U-2, Obj. V.C.1
U-1, and U-3 respectively --for normal loads
                  U-1, and U-3 respectively --for normal loads     Obj. V.D.1
OPL 171.037
              (3) Battery (4) Room is located on Unit 3 in the
Revision 10
                  Turbine Building on Elev. 586
Page 11 of 70
              (4) Battery (5 & 6) Rooms are located on the
Obj V.B.1
                  Turbine Floor, Elev. 617
Obj. V.C.1
              (5) The boards and chargers for the Unit Batteries
Obj. V.D.1
                  are located in Battery Board Rooms adjacent
(3)
                  to the batteries they serve, with the spare
Battery (4) Room is located on Unit 3 in the
                  charger being in the Unit 2 Battery Board
Turbine Building on Elev. 586
                  room. (Battery Boards 5 & 6 and their
(4)
                  associated chargers are located adjacent to
Battery (5 & 6) Rooms are located on the
                  the batteries, but are in the open space of the
Turbine Floor, Elev. 617
                  turbine floor.)
(5)
        c.   250V Plant DC components
The boards and chargers for the Unit Batteries
              (1) Battery charger
are located in Battery Board Rooms adjacent
                  (a)   The battery chargers are of the solid state
to the batteries they serve, with the spare
                        rectifier type. They normally supply loads
charger being in the Unit 2 Battery Board
                        on the 250V Plant DC Distribution
room. (Battery Boards 5 & 6 and their
                        System. Upon loss of power to the
associated chargers are located adjacent to
                        charger, the battery supplies the loads.
the batteries, but are in the open space of the
                  (b)   The main bank chargers only provide
turbine floor.)
                        float and equalize charge when tied to
c.
                        their loads. The chargers are not placed
250V Plant DC components
                        on fast charge (high voltage equalize)
(1)
                        with any loads attached.
Battery charger
                  (c)   They can recharge a fully discharged
(a)
                        battery in 12 hours while supplying
The battery chargers are of the solid state
                        normal loads.
rectifier type. They normally supply loads
                  (d)   Battery charger power supplies are         Follow Procedure
on the 250V Plant DC Distribution
                        manual transfer only.
System. Upon loss of power to the
  250V Battery                               Alternate Source
charger, the battery supplies the loads.
                    Normal Source                                   Obj. V.B.2
(b)
    Charaer                               (Charger Service bus)
The main bank chargers only provide
                                                                    Obj. V.C.2
float and equalize charge when tied to
                    480V SD Bd 1A         480V Common Bd 1
their loads. The chargers are not placed
      1                                                            Obj V.D.2
on fast charge (high voltage equalize)
                      Comp 6D                   Comp 3A
with any loads attached.
                    480V SD Bd 2A         480V Common Bd 1
(c)
      2A
They can recharge a fully discharged
                      Comp6D                    Comp 3A
battery in 12 hours while supplying
                    480V SD Bd 2B         480V Common Bd 1
normal loads.
      2B
(d)
(                      Comp6D
Battery charger power supplies are
                    480V SD Bd 3A
Follow Procedure
                                                Comp 3A
manual transfer only.
                                          480V Common Bd 1
(
      3
250V Battery
                      Comp 6D                   Comp3A
Normal Source
Alternate Source
Charaer
(Charger Service bus)
1
480V SD Bd 1A
480V Common Bd 1
Comp 6D
Comp 3A
2A
480V SD Bd 2A
480V Common Bd 1
Comp6D
Comp 3A
2B
480V SD Bd 2B
480V Common Bd 1
Comp6D
Comp 3A
3
480V SD Bd 3A
480V Common Bd 1
Comp 6D
Comp3A
Obj. V.B.2
Obj. V.C.2
Obj V.D.2


                                                                                OPL171.037
(
                                                                                Revision 10
4
                                                                                Page 12 of 70
5
                          480V SO Bd 3B       480V Common Bd 1
480V SO Bd 3B
(          4
Com
                            Com 60                  Com 3A
60
                        480V Com Bd 1
480V Com Bd 1
          5                                      (no alternate)
Com
                            Com 5C
5C
          6             480~o~or;gd   3           (no alternate)
480V Common Bd 1
  2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four
Com
  feeders. Three DC outputs can be connected to battery board 1,
3A
  2, or 3. The fourth output is connected to a new output transfer       TP-2 & TP-7
(no alternate)
  switch (located in battery board room 4) which charges batteries
OPL171.037
  4, 5, or 6 plant batteries. A meclianical interlocK permits closing
Revision 10
  only: one output feeaer at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery Attention to Detail
Page 12 of 70
  board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock is used in battery board
6
  room 4
480~o~or;gd 3
(no alternate)
2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four
feeders. Three DC outputs can be connected to battery board 1,
2, or 3. The fourth output is connected to a new output transfer
switch (located in battery board room 4) which charges batteries
4, 5, or 6 plant batteries. A meclianical interlocKpermits closing
only: one output feeaer at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery
board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock is used in battery board
room 4
TP-2 & TP-7
Attention to Detail


                                                                                      OPL171.037
(
                                                                                      Revision 10
XI.
                                                                                      Page 31 of 70
Summary
( XI.   Summary
We have discussed in detail the DC Power Systems at BFN.
        We have discussed in detail the DC Power Systems at BFN.
The electrical design and operation which makes these
        The electrical design and operation which makes these
systems so reliable has been explained. The various systems
        systems so reliable has been explained. The various systems
have been described with reference to function, components,
        have been described with reference to function, components,
locations, and electrical loads. Power sources have been
        locations, and electrical loads. Power sources have been
identified, and instrumentation has been noted. Significant
        identified, and instrumentation has been noted. Significant
control and alarm aspects have also been pointed out.
        control and alarm aspects have also been pointed out.
OPL171.037
  250V Battery Charger       Normal Source                 Alternate Source
Revision 10
                                                            (Charger Service bus)
Page 31 of 70
              1             480V SO Bd 1A, Comp 60 480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
250V Battery Charger
            2A             480V SO Bd 2A Comp 60         480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
Normal Source
            2B             480V SO Bd 2B, Comp 60 480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
Alternate Source
              3             480V SO Bd 3A, Comp 60 480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
(Charger Service bus)
              4               480V SO Bd 3B, Comp 60 480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
1
              5               480V Com Bd 1 Comp 5C         (no alternate)
480V SO Bd 1A, Comp 60
              6               480V Com Bd 3 Comp 3D         (no alternate)
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
  The 2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four feeders. Three DC outputs
2A
  can be connected to battery board 1, 2, or 3. The fourth DC output is connected to output
480V SO Bd 2A Comp 60
  transfer switch (BBR 4) to batteries 4, 5, or 6. Mechanical interlock permits closing only one
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
  output feeder at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock
2B
  is used in battery board room 4.)
480V SO Bd 2B, Comp 60
  250V DC battery chargers 1, 2A and 2B will load shed upon receipt of a Unit 1 or Unit 2
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
  accident signal and any Unit 1/2 shutdown board being supplied by its respective diesel
3
  generator or cross tied to a Unit 3 shutdown board and a unit three Diesel Generator. 250
480V SO Bd 3A, Comp 60
  VDC Battery Charger 3 will load shed on a unit 3 load shed signal.       e oad shedding feature
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
  can be b~ssed by. placing the "Emergency" switCii on the charger. to tfie "EMERG" P.Qsition.
4
  Station Battery charger 4 does not have load shed logic; however, battery charger 4 will
480V SO Bd 3B, Comp 60
  deenergize when 3B 480 SID Board deenergizes and will return when the 480V SID Board
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
  voltage returns.
5
  They also supply alternate control power for Units 1 and 2 4kV Shutdown Boards; however, on
480V Com Bd 1 Comp 5C
  Unit 3, the A, C, and 0 4kV Shutdown Boards receive both normal and alternate control power
(no alternate)
  from the 250V DC Unit Systems. (3EB receives alternate control power only.) The 250V DC
6
  RMOV Boards are supplied from the Unit Battery Board as follows:
480V Com Bd 3 Comp 3D
  BB-1 supplies 250V RMOV Boards 1A, 2C, 3B.
(no alternate)
  BB-2 supplies 250V RMOV Bds 2A, 1C, 3C.
The 2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four feeders. Three DC outputs
can be connected to battery board 1, 2, or 3. The fourth DC output is connected to output
transfer switch (BBR 4) to batteries 4, 5, or 6. Mechanical interlock permits closing only one
output feeder at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock
is used in battery board room 4.)
250V DC battery chargers 1, 2A and 2B will load shed upon receipt of a Unit 1 or Unit 2
accident signal and any Unit 1/2 shutdown board being supplied by its respective diesel
generator or cross tied to a Unit 3 shutdown board and a unit three Diesel Generator. 250
VDC Battery Charger 3 will load shed on a unit 3 load shed signal.
e oad shedding feature
can be b~ssed by. placing the "Emergency" switCii on the charger. to tfie "EMERG" P.Qsition.
Station Battery charger 4 does not have load shed logic; however, battery charger 4 will
deenergize when 3B 480 SID Board deenergizes and will return when the 480V SID Board
voltage returns.
They also supply alternate control power for Units 1 and 2 4kV Shutdown Boards; however, on
Unit 3, the A, C, and 0 4kV Shutdown Boards receive both normal and alternate control power
from the 250V DC Unit Systems. (3EB receives alternate control power only.) The 250V DC
RMOV Boards are supplied from the Unit Battery Board as follows:
BB-1 supplies 250V RMOV Boards 1A, 2C, 3B.
BB-2 supplies 250V RMOV Bds 2A, 1C, 3C.


                                                                                                  OPL171.037
OPL171.037
                                                                                                  Revision 10
Revision 10
                                                                                                  Page 47 of70
Page 47 of70
(                                                 -
(
      480vSO BO 1A
-
                                                ..=.         -=                      -:=                    -:=
=
                NOR
:=
                          ............
:=
          BATTERY
..=.
          CHARGER
-
            No .1
-
                ALT
-
                          ............
480vSO BO 1A
        480v SO B02A
NOR
                        ............
............
          BATTERY
BATTERY
          CHARGER
CHARGER
            No.2A
No.1
                ALT
ALT
                      .............
............
        480v SO BO 2B
480v SO B02A
                NOR
............
                        ............
BATTERY
          BATTERY
CHARGER
          CHARGER                                                                                               ~
No.2A
                                                                                                                en
ALT
            No.2B                                                                                               0:
.............
                                                                                                                w
480v SO BO 2B
                                                                                                                u..
NOR
                ALT                                                                                             en
............
                                                                                                                z
BATTERY
                      1 ************ -
~
                                                                                                                ~
CHARGER
                                                                                                                I-
en
                                                                                                                ~
No.2B
        480v SO B03A                                                                                             0..
0:w
                                                                                                                I-
u..
                                                                                                                ;:)
ALT
                NOR    ,.-------.---i                                                                           0
enz
                                          I
1************-
                                        :                                                                       aJ
~I-
                                                                                                                N
480v SO B03A
                                        :
~
          BATTERY
0..
          CHARGER                       *:*
I-
                                                                                                                0
NOR
                                                                                                                I-
;:)
            No.3
,.-------.---i
                                        *:
0
                ALT
I
                        ............ ;
aJ
        480v SO BO 3B
:
                NOR
BATTERY
          BATTERY
:
          CHARGER t--------+-----+--+----i--+---;--i----+---+-____
N
            NO.4
CHARGER
    1-----' ALT
*
                                            BATT      BATT                BATT                    BATT
0
                                            BO 1     B02                 B03                     B04
*
    480v                                                         .... ... ........_..     ..................
I-
  COMMON
:
    BO 1
No.3
                                    TP-2 250V DC Power Distribution
**
ALT
:
............;
480v SO BO 3B
NOR
BATTERY
CHARGER t--------+-----+--+----i--+---;--i----+---+-____
NO.4
1-----' ALT
BATT
BO 1
BATT
B02
BATT
B03
BATT
B04
480v
COMMON
BO 1
..............._..
..................
TP-2
250V DC Power Distribution


  22. RO 264000K5.06 00 l/C/A/T2Gl/82 - DG/9/264000K5.06//RO/SRO/
(
        Given the following plant conditions:
(
                *   Unit 2 is operating at Full Power.
22. RO 264000K5.06 00 l/C/A/T2Gl/82 - DG/9/264000K5.06//RO/SRO/
(              *   No Equipment is Out of Service.
Given the following plant conditions:
                *   A large leak occurs in the drywell and the following conditions exist:
*
                    - Drywell Pressure peaked at 28 psig and is currently at 20 psig.
Unit 2 is operating at Full Power.
                    - Reactor Pressure is at 110 psig.
*
                    - Reactor Water Level is at -120 inches
No Equipment is Out of Service.
                    - Offsite power is available .
*
      Which ONE of the following describes the proper loading sequence and associated equipment?
A large leak occurs in the drywell and the following conditions exist:
      A. II 28 RHR and 28 Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received .
- Drywell Pressure peaked at 28 psig and is currently at 20 psig.
      B.     RHRSW pumps lined up for EECW start at 14 seconds after the accident signal is received.
- Reactor Pressure is at 110 psig.
      c.     Core Spray pumps (2A, 28, 2C, 2D) start immediately when voltage is available on the respective
- Reactor Water Level is at -120 inches
              shutdown board.
- Offsite power is available.
      D.     2C RHR and 2C Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received .
Which ONE of the following describes the proper loading sequence and associated equipment?
      KIA Statement:
A. II 28 RHR and 28 Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.
(      264000 EDGs
B.
      K5.06 - Knowledge of the operational implications of the following concepts as they apply to
RHRSW pumps lined up for EECW start at 14 seconds after the accident signal is received.
      EMERGENCY GENERATORS (DIESEUJET): Load sequencing
c.
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
Core Spray pumps (2A, 28, 2C, 2D) start immediately when voltage is available on the respective
      plant conditions and times to correctly determine the effect of.load sequencing on plant equipment
shutdown board.
      supplied by the Emergency Generators.
D.
      References:
2C RHR and 2C Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
KIA Statement:
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
264000 EDGs
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome .
K5.06 - Knowledge of the operational implications of the following concepts as they apply to
      0610 NRC Exam
EMERGENCY GENERATORS (DIESEUJET): Load sequencing
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions and times to correctly determine the effect of.load sequencing on plant equipment
supplied by the Emergency Generators.
References:
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
  Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
(
  1. Load Sequencing is NVA (Normal Voltage Available) and NOT DGVA (DIG Voltage Available).
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  2. Based on Item 1 above, theproper load sequencing with a Common Accident Signal (CAS) on Unit-2
1. Load Sequencing is NVA (Normal Voltage Available) and NOT DGVA (DIG Voltage Available).
    alone and NOT in addition to a CAS on Unit 1.
2. Based on Item 1 above, theproper load sequencing with a Common Accident Signal (CAS) on Unit-2
  A is correct.
alone and NOT in addition to a CAS on Unit 1.
  B is incorrect. This is plusible because RHRSW pumps all start at 14 seconds if load sequencing is
A is correct.
  DGVA.
B is incorrect. This is plusible because RHRSW pumps all start at 14 seconds if load sequencing is
  C is incorrect. This is plausible based on Load Sequencing logic prior to a modification for Unit 1 restart
DGVA.
  activities.
C is incorrect. This is plausible based on Load Sequencing logic prior to a modification for Unit 1 restart
  D is incorrect. This is plausible because 2-01-74 P&L 3.2.B defines the start time as 7 second
activities.
  "intervals".
D is incorrect. This is plausible because 2-01-74 P&L 3.2.B defines the start time as 7 second
"intervals".
(
(


                                                                                  OPL171.038
(
                                                                                  Revision 16
b.
                                                                                  Page 38 of63
(2)
(                                                                            INSTRUCTOR NOTES
Opens diesel output breakers if shut.
                          (2)    Opens diesel output breakers if shut.    ou.v.s.s
If normal voltage is available, load will
                    b.    If normal voltage is available, load will        ou.v.c.e
sequence on as follows: (NVA)
                          sequence on as follows: (NVA)                    Obj.v.D.15
OPL171.038
                                                                            oejv.s. 15
Revision 16
  Time After Accident SID Board SID Board           SID Board     SID Board
Page 38 of63
                              A             C               B             D
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
          , 0-         RHR/GS-A_ l
ou.v.s.s
        7                             RHR/CS B
ou.v.c.e
        14                                           RHR/CS C
Obj.v.D.15
        21                                                         RHR/CS D
oejv.s. 15
        28             RHRSW           RHRSW         RHRSW*       RHRSW
Time After Accident
        *RHRSW pumps assigned for. EECW automatic start
SID Board
                    c.   If ormal voltage is NeT- available: (DGVA) ouv.e.s
SID Board
                                                                            ouv.c.e
SID Board
                          (1)     After 5-second time delay, all4kV
SID Board
                                  Shutdown Board loads except
A
                                  4160/480V transformer breakers are
C
                                  automatically tripped.
B
                          (2)     Diesel generator output breaker closes
D
                                  when diesel is at speed.
, 0-
                          (3)    Loads sequence as indicated below
RHR/GS-A_ l
  Time After Accident SID Board SID Board            SID Board      SID Board
7
                              A            B              C            D
RHR/CS B
            0            RHR A          RHR C          RHR B        RHR D
14
        7                CSA            CS C            CS B          CS D
RHR/CS C
        14            RHRSW*          RHRSW*          RHRSW*        RHRSW*
21
        *RHRSW pumps assigned for EECW automatic start
RHR/CS D
                    d.   Certain 480V loads are shed whenever an
28
                          accident signal is received in conjunction with
RHRSW
                          the diesel generator tied to the board. (see
RHRSW
                          OPL171.072)
RHRSW*
RHRSW
*RHRSW pumps assigned for. EECW automatic start
c.
If
ormal voltage is NeT-available: (DGVA)
(1)
After 5-second time delay, all4kV
Shutdown Board loads except
4160/480V transformer breakers are
automatically tripped.
(2)
Diesel generator output breaker closes
when diesel is at speed.
ouv.e.s
ouv.c.e
c.
c.
(3)
Loads sequence as indicated below
Time After Accident
SID Board
SID Board
SID Board
SID Board
A
B
C
D
0
RHR A
RHR C
RHR B
RHR D
7
CSA
CS C
CS B
CS D
14
RHRSW*
RHRSW*
RHRSW*
RHRSW*
*RHRSW pumps assigned for EECW automatic start
d.
Certain 480V loads are shed whenever an
accident signal is received in conjunction with
the diesel generator tied to the board. (see
OPL171.072)


      BFN                Residual Heat Removal System            2-01-74
      Unit 2                                                      Rev. 0133
(                                                                  Page 17 of 367
  3.2  LPCI (continued)
        B.    Upon an automatic LPCI initiation with normal power available, RFiR P-ump 2~
            starts imme aiately. and 2B, 2C, 2D sequentially start at 7 second intervals.
            Otherwise, all RHR pumps start immediately once diesel power is available
            (and normal power unavailable).
      C.    Manually stopping an RHR pump after LPCI initiation disables automatic restart
            of that pump until the initiation signal is reset. The affected RHR pump can still
            be started manually.
  3.3  Shutdown Cooling
      A.    Prior to initiating Shutdown Cooling, RHR should be flushed to Radwaste until
            conductivity is less than 2.0 micromho/cm with less than 0.1 ppm chlorides
            (unless directed otherwise by 2-AOI-74-1, Loss of Shutdown Cooling). If CS&S
            has been aligned as the keep fill source for two days or more a chemistry
            sample should be requested and results analyzed to determine if flushing is
            required.
      B.    When in Shutdown Cooling, reactor temperature should be maintained greater
            than 72&deg;F and only be controlled by throttling RHRSW flow. This is to assure
            adequate mixing of reactor water.
            1.  [NER/C] Reactor vessel water temperatures below 68&deg;F exceed the
                  temperature reactivity assumed in the criticality analysis. [INPO SER 90-017]
            2.  [NER/C] Maintaining water temperature below 100&deg;F minimizes the release of
                  soluble activity. [GE SIL 541]
      C.    Shutdown Cooling operation at saturated conditions (212&deg;F) with 2 RHR pumps
            operating at or near combined maximum flow (20,000 gpm) could cause Jet
            Pump Cavitation. Indications of Jet Pump Cavitation are as follows:
            1.  Rise in RHR System flow without a corresponding rise in Jet Pump flow.
            2.  Fluctuation of Jet Pump flow.
            3.  Louder "Rumbling" noise heard when vessel head is off.
            Corrective action for any of these symptoms would be to reduce RHR flow until
            the symptom is corrected.
(
(
(
BFN
Residual Heat Removal System
2-01-74
Unit 2
Rev. 0133
Page 17 of 367
3.2
LPCI (continued)
B.
Upon an automatic LPCI initiation with normal power available, RFiR P-ump 2~
starts immeaiately. and 2B, 2C, 2D sequentially start at 7 second intervals.
Otherwise, all RHR pumps start immediately once diesel power is available
(and normal power unavailable).
C.
Manually stopping an RHR pump after LPCI initiation disables automatic restart
of that pump until the initiation signal is reset. The affected RHR pump can still
be started manually.
3.3
Shutdown Cooling
A.
Prior to initiating Shutdown Cooling, RHR should be flushed to Radwaste until
conductivity is less than 2.0 micromho/cm with less than 0.1 ppm chlorides
(unless directed otherwise by 2-AOI-74-1, Loss of Shutdown Cooling). If CS&S
has been aligned as the keep fill source for two days or more a chemistry
sample should be requested and results analyzed to determine if flushing is
required.
B.
When in Shutdown Cooling, reactor temperature should be maintained greater
than 72&deg;F and only be controlled by throttling RHRSW flow. This is to assure
adequate mixing of reactor water.
1.
[NER/C] Reactor vessel water temperatures below 68&deg;F exceed the
temperature reactivity assumed in the criticality analysis.
[INPO SER 90-017]
2.
[NER/C] Maintaining water temperature below 100&deg;F minimizes the release of
soluble activity.
[GE SIL 541]
C.
Shutdown Cooling operation at saturated conditions (212&deg;F) with 2 RHR pumps
operating at or near combined maximum flow (20,000 gpm) could cause Jet
Pump Cavitation. Indications of Jet Pump Cavitation are as follows:
1.
Rise in RHR System flow without a corresponding rise in Jet Pump flow.
2.
Fluctuation of Jet Pump flow.
3.
Louder "Rumbling" noise heard when vessel head is off.
Corrective action for any of these symptoms would be to reduce RHR flow until
the symptom is corrected.


  23. RO 300000K2.02 001/MEM/T2Gl/CAI1300000K2.02/2.8/2.8/RO/SR0/1l/16/07 RMS
      Which ONE of the follow ing desc ribes the power supplies to the Control and Service Air Compressor
      motors?
(
(
      A.   "A" and "8" are fed from the 480V Common 8d. #1
23. RO 300000K2.02 001/MEM/T2Gl/CAI1300000K2.02/2.8/2.8/RO/SR0/1l/16/07 RMS
            "C" and "0" from 480V SID 8d . 18 & 28 , respectively
Which ONE of the follow ing describes the power supplies to the Control and Service Air Compressor
            "G" from 4KV SID 8d . 8 and 480 SO 8d . 2A
motors?
            "E" from the 480V Common 8d . #1
A.
      B.   "A" and "0" from 480V Common 8d . 1
"A" and "8" are fed from the 480V Common 8d. #1
            "8" and "C" from 480V SID 8d . 18 & 28, respectively
"C" and "0" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28 , respectively
            "G" from 4KV SID 8d . 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A
"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480 SO 8d. 2A
            "F" from 480V Common 8d. #3
"E" from the 480V Common 8d. #1
      C.   "A" from 480V SID 8d . 18
B.
            "8" and "F" from 480V Common 8d . #3
"A" and "0" from 480V Common 8d . 1
            "C" from 480V SID 8d . 1A
"8" and "C" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28, respectively
            "0" from 480V SID 8d . 2A
"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A
            "G" from 4KV Common 8d .#2
"F" from 480V Common 8d. #3
      0. 01 "A" from 480V SID 8d . 18
C.
            "8" and "C" from 480V Common 8d . #1
"A" from 480V SID 8d. 18
            "0" from 480V SID 8d . 2A
"8" and "F" from 480V Common 8d. #3
            "G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d . 2A
"C" from 480V SID 8d. 1A
            "E" from 480V Common 8d. #3
"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A
      KJA Statement:
"G" from 4KV Common 8d.#2
      300000 Instrument Air                                               .
0. 01 "A" from 480V SID 8d. 18
      K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following : Emergency air compressor
"8" and "C" from 480V Common 8d . #1
      KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A
      knowledge of the power supplies of ALL air compressors.
"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A
      References:
"E" from 480V Common 8d. #3
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
KJA Statement:
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
300000 Instrument Air
      0610 NRC Exam
.
K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Emergency air compressor
KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of the power supplies of ALL air compressors.
References:
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
  Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
(
  1. Power supplies to six air compressors.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  NOTE: Regarding plausibility, all the power supplies listed in the distractors are capable of supplying
1. Power supplies to six air compressors.
  power to each air compressor.
NOTE: Regarding plausibility, all the power supplies listed in the distractors are capable of supplying
  A is incorrect. B, G & E are correct. A, C & D are incorrect.
power to each air compressor.
  B is incorrect. F & G are correct. A, B, C, & D are incorrect.
A is incorrect. B, G & E are correct. A, C & D are incorrect.
  C is incorrect. A, D & F are correct. B, C & G are incorrect
B is incorrect. F & G are correct. A, B, C, & D are incorrect.
  D is correct.
C is incorrect. A, D & F are correct. B, C &G are incorrect
D is correct.


                                                                                    OPL 171.054
(
                                                                                    Revision 12
(
                                                                                    Page 9 of 72
X. Lesson Body
( X. Lesson Body
A. Control Air System
    A. Control Air System
1. **The purpose of the Control Air System is to process
        1. **The purpose of the Control Air System is to process         ** SOER 88-1
and distribute oil-free control air, dried to a low dew point
            and distribute oil-free control air, dried to a low dew point Obj . V.E.1
and free of foreign materials. This high-quality air is
            and free of foreign materials. This high-quality air is
required throughout the plant and yard to ensure the
            required throughout the plant and yard to ensure the
proper functioning of pneumatically operated
            proper functioning of pneumatically operated
instruments, valves, and final operators.
            instruments, valves, and final operators.
2. Basic Description of Flow Path
        2. Basic Description of Flow Path                                 TP-1
a. The station control air system has 5 air compressors,
            a. The station control air system has 5 air compressors,     Obj. V.E.3
each designed for continuous operation.
                each designed for continuous operation.                   Obj. V.D.1
b. Common header (fed by air compressors A-D and G)
            b. Common header (fed by air compressors A-D and G)
(1) The control air system is normally aligned with the
                (1) The control air system is normally aligned with the   The G air compressor
G air compressor running and loaded. The
                    G air compressor running and loaded. The             will be discussed later in
existing A-D air compressors are aligned with one
                    existing A-D air compressors are aligned with one     this section of the lesson
in second lead , one in third lead, and at least one
                    in second lead , one in third lead, and at least one plan.
compressor in standby.
                    compressor in standby.
(2) 3 control air receivers
                (2) 3 control air receivers
(3) 4 dual dryers One for each unit's control air
                (3) 4 dual dryers One for each unit's control air
header (units 1, 2 & 3 through their 4-inch
                    header (units 1, 2 & 3 through their 4-inch
headers) and One standby dryer supplies the
                    headers) and One standby dryer supplies the
standby, 3- inch common control air header for all
                    standby, 3- inch common control air header for all    normally aligned to all
three units
                    three units                                          three units
(4) Outlet from large service air receiver is connected
                (4) Outlet from large service air receiver is connected
to the control air receivers through a pressure
                    to the control air receivers through a pressure
control valve 0-FCV-33-1, which will automatically
                    control valve 0-FCV-33-1, which will automatically
open to supply service air to the control air
                    open to supply service air to the control air
header if control air pressure falls to 85 psig.
                    header if control air pressure falls to 85 psig .
c. 4-inch control air header (1 per unit) is supplied from
            c. 4-inch control air header (1 per unit) is supplied from   TP-1
each unit dryer and backed up by a common, 3-inch
                each unit dryer and backed up by a common, 3-inch
standby header.
                standby header.
3. Control Air System Component Description
        3. Control Air System Component Description
a. Four Reciprocating Air Compressors A-D (2-stage,
            a. Four Reciprocating Air Compressors A-D (2-stage,
double acting, V-type) are located EI 565, U-1
              double acting, V-type) are located EI 565, U-1
Turbine Building.
              Turbine Building.
(1) Supply air to the control air receivers at 610 scfm
              (1) Supply air to the control air receivers at 610 scfm
each at a normal operating pressure of 90 - 101
                    each at a normal operating pressure of 90 - 101
psig.
                    psig.
(2) 480V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, drive motors
              (2) 480V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, drive motors
(3) Power supplies
(              (3) Power supplies
A from 480V Shutdown Board 1B
                    A from 480V Shutdown Board 1B
OPL171.054
Revision 12
Page 9 of 72
** SOER 88-1
Obj. V.E.1
TP-1
Obj. V.E.3
Obj. V.D.1
The G air compressor
will be discussed later in
this section of the lesson
plan.
normally aligned to all
three units
TP-1


                                                                          OPL171 .054
(
                                                                          Revision 12
o from 480V Shutdown Board 2A
                                                                          Page 10 of 72
B from 480V Common Board 1
(            o from   480V Shutdown Board 2A
C from 480V Common Board 1
            B from 480V Common Board 1
(a) Control air compressors which are powered
            C from 480V Common Board 1
from the 480 VAC shutdown boards are
            (a) Control air compressors which are powered       Obj . V .B.1.
tripped automatically due to:
                from the 480 VAC shutdown boards are           Obj . V .C.1.
i.
                tripped automatically due to:
under voltage on the shutdown board.
                  i. under voltage on the shutdown board.
ii.
                ii. load shed logic during an accident signal
load shed logic during an accident signal
                    concurrent with a loss of offsite power.
concurrent with a loss of offsite power.
                    NOTE: The compressors must be
NOTE: The compressors must be
                    restarted manually after power is restored
restarted manually after power is restored
                    to the board.
to the board.
            (b) Units powered from common boards also trip
(b) Units powered from common boards also trip
                due to under voltage.
due to under voltage.
        (4) Lubrication provided from attached oil system via
(4) Lubrication provided from attached oil system via
            gear-type oil pump
gear-type oil pump
            (a) Compressor trips on                             Obj . V .B.2.
(a) Compressor trips on
                lube oil pressure < 10 psig                     Obj. V .C.2.
lube oil pressure < 10 psig
                or                                             Obj. V .E.12
or
                lube oil temperature >180 of                   Obj . V .D.10
lube oil temperature >180 of
            (b) Compressor cylinder is a non lubricated type
(b) Compressor cylinder is a non lubricated type
        (5) Cooling water is from the Raw Cooling Water
(5) Cooling water is from the Raw Cooling Water
            system with backup from EECW
system with backup from EECW
            (a) Compressor oil cooler, compressor inter-
(a) Compressor oil cooler, compressor inter-
                cooler, after cooler and cylinder water jackets
cooler, after cooler and cylinder water jackets
            (b) Compressor inter-cooler and after cooler
(b) Compressor inter-cooler and after cooler
                moisture traps drain moisture to the Unit 1
moisture traps drain moisture to the Unit 1
                station sump .
station sump .
  NOTE: Cooling water flows to the compressors are regulated     Obj. V .B.2.
NOTE: Cooling water flows to the compressors are regulated
        such that the RCW outlet temperature is maintained       Obj . V .C.2.
such that the RCW outlet temperature is maintained
        between 70&deg; F and 100&deg; F. Outlet temperatures           Obj. V .E.12
between 70&deg; F and 100&deg; F. Outlet temperatures
        should be adjusted low in the band (high flow rates)
should be adjusted low in the band (high flow rates)
        during warm seasons (river temps. ~ 70&deg;F). Outlet
during warm seasons (river temps. ~ 70&deg;F). Outlet
        temperatures should be adjusted high in the band
temperatures should be adjusted high in the band
        during the cooler seasons (river temps ~ 70&deg;F) to
during the cooler seasons (river temps ~ 70&deg;F) to
        reduce condensation in the cylinders.
reduce condensation in the cylinders.
            (c) Compressor auto trips if discharge
(c) Compressor auto trips if discharge
                temperature of air> 310&deg; F.
temperature of air> 310&deg; F.
    b. Unloaders                                               Obj. V.D .10
b. Unloaders
OPL171 .054
Revision 12
Page 10 of 72
Obj. V.B.1.
Obj. V.C.1.
Obj. V.B.2.
Obj. V.C.2.
Obj. V.E.12
Obj. V.D.10
Obj. V.B.2.
Obj. V.C.2.
Obj. V.E.12
Obj. V.D .10


                                                                      OPL 171.054
(
                                                                      Revision 12
(b) Should both the primary and the backup
                                                                      Page 14 of 72
controllers fail, all four compressors will come
(        (b) Should both the primary and the backup           Cutout switch setpoints
on line at full load until these pressure
            controllers fail, all four compressors will come are set at 112 psig to
switches cause the compressors to unload at
            on line at full load until these pressure       prevent spurious
112 psig.
            switches cause the compressors to unload at     operation when G air
(c) When air pressure drops below the high
            112 psig.                                       compressor running
pressure cutoff setpoint (110.8 psig), the
        (c) When air pressure drops below the high
compressors will again come on line at full
            pressure cutoff setpoint (110.8 psig), the
load until the high pressure cutoff switches
            compressors will again come on line at full
cause the compressors to unload.
            load until the high pressure cutoff switches
d. Relief valves on the compressors discharge set at
            cause the compressors to unload.
120 psig protects the compressor and piping.
  d. Relief valves on the compressors discharge set at
e. G Air Compressor - centrifugal type, two stage
    120 psig protects the compressor and piping.
(1) Located 565' EL Turbine Bldg. , Unit 1 end.
  e. G Air Compressor - centrifugal type, two stage
Control Air Compressor G is the primary control
    (1) Located 565' EL Turbine Bldg. , Unit 1 end.
air compressor and provides most of the control
        Control Air Compressor G is the primary control
air needed for normal plant operation.
        air compressor and provides most of the control
(2) Rated at 1440 SCFM @ 105 psig.
        air needed for normal plant operation.
(3) Power Supply
    (2) Rated at 1440 SCFM @ 105 psig.
(a) 4 kV Shutdown Board B supplies power to
    (3) Power Supply
the compressor motor.
        (a) 4 kV Shutdown Board B supplies power to
(b) 480 V RMOV Bd. 2A Supplies the following :
            the compressor motor.
*
        (b) 480 V RMOV Bd. 2A Supplies the following :
Pre lube pump
                * Pre lube pump
*
                * Oil reservoir heater
Oil reservoir heater
                * Cooling water pumps
*
                * Panel(s) control power
Cooling water pumps
                * Auto Restart circuit
*
        (c) Except for short power interruptions on the
Panel(s) control power
            480v RMOV Bd, Loss of either of these two
*
            power supplies will result in a shutdown of the
Auto Restart circuit
            G air compressor.
(c) Except for short power interruptions on the
    (4) A complete description of the G Air compressor       Cover 01 illustrations
480v RMOV Bd, Loss of either of these two
        controls and indications can be found in 0-01-32 .
power supplies will result in a shutdown of the
        (The G and the F air compressor indications and
G air compressor.
        Microcontrollers are similar).
(4) A complete description of the G Air compressor
        (a) UNLOAD MODULATE AUTO DUAL                       TP-8
controls and indications can be found in 0-01-32.
            handswitch is used to select the mode of
(The G and the F air compressor indications and
            operation for the compressor
Microcontrollers are similar).
(a) UNLOAD MODULATE AUTO DUAL
handswitch is used to select the mode of
operation for the compressor
OPL171.054
Revision 12
Page 14 of 72
Cutout switch setpoints
are set at 112 psig to
prevent spurious
operation when G air
compressor running
Cover 01 illustrations
TP-8


                                                                          OPL171.054
3. Component Description
                                                                          Revision 12
a. Compressors E and F (EL 565, U-3 Turbine Building)
                                                                          Page 30 of 72
are designated for service air.
3. Component Description                                       Obj. V.E.6
b. The F air compressor is rated for approximately 630
  a. Compressors E and F (EL 565, U-3 Turbine Building)       Obj. V.DA
SCFM @ 105 psig, centrifugal type, 2 stages
      are designated for service air.
c. The power supply for both compressors is 480VAC
  b. The F air compressor is rated for approximately 630
Common Board 3.
      SCFM @ 105 psig, centrifugal type, 2 stages
d. FIG air compressor comparison
  c. The power supply for both compressors is 480VAC
(1) Controls are similar to that of the G air
      Common Board 3.
compressor. There is no 4KV breaker control on
  d. FIG air compressor comparison
the F air compressor control panel.
      (1) Controls are similar to that of the G air           TP-16
(2) Control system modulates discharge air pressure
          compressor. There is no 4KV breaker control on       ouv.s.r
in the same manner as is done on the G air
          the F air compressor control panel.                 Obj. V.D.5
compressor.
      (2) Control system modulates discharge air pressure     Set to control at approx.
(3) Air system is similar to the G air compressor. A
          in the same manner as is done on the G air           95 psig - Relief Valve is
difference is that the 2 stages of compression are
          compressor.                                          set to lift at. ~ 115 psig.
driven by one shaft for the F air compressor. On
      (3) Air system is similar to the G air compressor. A
the G air compressor, there is a separate drives;
          difference is that the 2 stages of compression are   TP-17
one for each of 3 compression stages.
          driven by one shaft for the F air compressor. On
(4) Oil system similar to that on the G air compressor
          the G air compressor, there is a separate drives;
with exception of location of components and
          one for each of 3 compression stages.
capacity. E compressor has an electric oil pump
      (4) Oil system similar to that on the G air compressor   TP-18
that runs whenever control power is on.
          with exception of location of components and
(5) Cooling system is similar to that on the G air
          capacity. E compressor has an electric oil pump
compressor with exception of flow rate, location,
          that runs whenever control power is on.
and capacity of components.
      (5) Cooling system is similar to that on the G air       TP-19
(6) Loss of power will result in F air compressor trip,
          compressor with exception of flow rate, location,
loss of the pre lube pump, and the cooling water
          and capacity of components.
pumps .
      (6) Loss of power will result in F air compressor trip ,
(7) Restart of the compressor can be accomplished
          loss of the pre lube pump, and the cooling water
once the compressor has come to a full stop and
          pumps .
any trip conditions cleared and reset.
      (7) Restart of the compressor can be accomplished
e. AlarmslTrips
          once the compressor has come to a full stop and
(1) The Alert and Shutdown setpoints for the Fair
          any trip conditions cleared and reset.
compressor are listed in 0-01-33.
  e. AlarmslTrips
OPL171.054
      (1) The Alert and Shutdown setpoints for the Fair       See for latest setpoints
Revision 12
          compressor are listed in 0-01-33.
Page 30 of 72
Obj. V.E.6
Obj. V.DA
TP-16
ouv.s.r
Obj. V.D.5
Set to control at approx.
95 psig - Relief Valve is
set to lift at.~ 115 psig.
TP-17
TP-18
TP-19
See for latest setpoints


  24. RO 300000K3.0 1 00 lIelA /T2G lISGT/B 1OB/300000 K3 .0 113 .2/3 A/RO/SRO/l l /l 6/07 RMS
(
      A LOCA has occurred on Unit 1 and the drywell is being vented to SBGT, when a loss of the Control Air
24. RO 300000K3.01 00 lIelA/T2G lISGT/B 1OB/300000K3.0113.2/3A/RO/SRO/l l/l 6/07 RMS
      system occurs .
A LOCA has occurred on Unit 1 and the drywell is being vented to SBGT, when a loss of the Control Air
(      Which ONE of the following describes the operatio n of vent valves 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD
system occurs.
      ISOL VALVE and 1-FCV-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT?
Which ONE of the following describes the operation of vent valves 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD
      A.     Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will fail close and can not be operated .
ISOL VALVE and 1-FCV-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT?
      8.   Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line
A.
            with no operator action required.
Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will fail close and can not be operated .
      C.oI Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line,
8.
            however CAD supply must be manually aligned from the control room .
Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line
      D.   The CAD system must be manually initiated and then vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 may
with no operator action required.
            be realigned to the CAD supply .
C.oI Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line,
      KIA Statement:
however CAD supply must be manually aligned from the control room.
      300000 Instrument Air
D.
      K3.01 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the (INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM) will have
The CAD system must be manually initiated and then vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 may
      on the following: Conta inment air system
be realigned to the CAD supply.
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
KIA Statement:
      plant conditions to determine the effect on the conta inment air system due to a loss of Control Air.
300000 Instrument Air
      References: 1-EOI Appendicies 8G and 12, 1-AOI-32-2
K3.01 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
(INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM) will have
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome . This requires mentally using this
on the following: Containment air system
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
      0610 NRC Exam
plant conditions to determine the effect on the containment air system due to a loss of Control Air.
      REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
References: 1-EOI Appendicies 8G and 12, 1-AOI-32-2
      Plausibility Analysis:
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
      In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
      1. Whether the vent valves automatically swap to be supplied by CAD or must be manuall y aligned.
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
      2. Whether CAD supply to DW Control Air automatically swaps or must be manually aligned .
0610 NRC Exam
      A is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves DO fail closed, however, they can be operated
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
      with manual alignment of the CAD Tanks.
Plausibility Analysis:
      B is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves will auto swap to control from the CAD supply
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
      line, howeve r the CAD tanks must be manually aligned.
1. Whether the vent valves automatically swap to be supplied by CAD or must be manually aligned.
      C is correct.
2. Whether CAD supply to DW Control Air automatically swaps or must be manually aligned.
      D is incorrect. This is plausible becase the CAD system must be manually initiated, however once this is
A is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves DO fail closed, however, they can be operated
      accomplished, no further alignment is necessary.
with manual alignment of the CAD Tanks.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves will auto swap to control from the CAD supply
line, however the CAD tanks must be manually aligned.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible becase the CAD system must be manually initiated, however once this is
accomplished, no further alignment is necessary.


                                                              1*EOI APPENDIX*12
(
  BFN
BFN
                    PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING                           Rev. 0
1*EOI APPENDIX*12
  UNIT 1
UNIT 1
(                                                                      Page 4 ofa
PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING
        f.     VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
Rev. 0
              approximately 100 scfm.
Page 4 ofa
        g.     CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.
f.
  10.   VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, as
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
        follows:
approximately 100 scfm.
        a.     VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141 , DRYWELL DP COMP
g.
              BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).
CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.
        b.     PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT
10.
              ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).
VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, as
        c.     VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL
follows:
              VALVE (Panel 1-9-54).
a.
        d.     PLACE 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO
VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141 , DRYWELL DP COMP
              with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).
BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).
        e.     PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-19, 1-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in
b.
              OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT
        f.     VERIFY 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).
              approximately 100 scfm.
c.
      g.     CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.
VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL
  11. VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as
VALVE (Panel 1-9-54).
      follows:
d.
      a.     VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP
PLACE 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO
              BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).
with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).
      b.     PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR I DWVENT
e.
              ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-19, 1-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in
      c.     VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-31 , DRYWELL INBD ISOL VALVE
OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).
              (Panel 1-9-54).
f.
      d.     VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
              with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).
approximately 100 scfm.
      e.     PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-20, 1-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION
g.
              BYPASS, in BYPASS (Panel 1-9-55).
CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.
      f.     VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
11.
              approximately 100 scfm.
VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as
follows:
a.
VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP
BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).
b.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR I DWVENT
ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).
c.
VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBD ISOL VALVE
(Panel 1-9-54).
d.
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO
with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).
e.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-20, 1-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION
BYPASS, in BYPASS (Panel 1-9-55).
f.
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
approximately 100 scfm.


                                                                    1-EOI APPENDIX-12
(
  BFN                                                                              Rev. 0
1-EOI APPENDIX-12
( UNIT 1
Rev. 0
                  PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING
BFN
                                                                                Page 7 of 8
PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING
                                                                          A ITACHMENT 1
Page 7 of 8
                                      ...J
UNIT 1
                                      ...J
AITACHMENT 1
                                      ~
...J
                                      o
...J
      3:
~o
      w
3:
      sIt:    en
0
              I-                                    2"
ws
                                                          0
en
      W     oen              &,
2"
      >0      0
It:
                              .....                   64-34
I-
              I-         c>>                                 ~
W
      :E      A-         N
o
                          ....eo                    ~          N
&,
      W                                                    0   '?
64-34
      .....                                                     -e
>
      en                                                        eo
en
      >-
.....
      en             -
0
      .....           I
0
      z
~
      w
~
      >               I
I-
                      '---
c>>
                                          ~
A-
                          0
N
                          '?
N
                          -e
:E
                                    0                     0  '"
....
                                                                '"
0
                                                                ....eo
'?
                          eo
W
                    9&#xa3;-\79
eo
                      ~
-e
                                                en
.....
                                            we::
eo
                                            ClW
en>-
                                            e::~
-
                                                    i
en
                                            ~-
I
                                            Q.u.
.....z
    o0                                      ...Jo
I
                                            ...JZ
w>
    ...J                                    w<                       o
'---
      al en                                  ~en                       gz
~
    e::<  z                                >-z                       alO
'"
    Ou.                                    e::<
0
                                            Ou.
0
    1-1-                                                              e::i=1-
'"
      tl en                                                            o~en
'?
                                                                      I-_~
0
      i5~
....
      e::~ <;
-e
                                                    I                  tll-<
eo
                                                                      i5 wx
eo
                                                                          Z J:
9&#xa3;-\\79
    ox
~
      I-W
en
                                                                      e::>w
we::
ClW
e::~i
~-
Q.u.
...Jo
o
...JZ
o
w<
0
~en
gz
...J en
>-z
alO
al z
e::<
e::i=1-
e::<
Ou.
Ou.
o~en
1-1-
I
I-_~
tl en
tll-<
i5~
i5 Z J:
wx
e::~ <;
e::>w
ox
I-W


                                                                        1-EOI APPENDIX-8G
(
  BFN                          CROSSTIE CAD TO
BFN
                                                                                    Rev. 0
CROSSTIE CAD TO
  UNIT 1                   DRYWELL CONTROL AIR
1-EOI APPENDIX-8G
(                                                                              Page 1 of 2
UNIT 1
  LOCATION:           Unit 1 Control Room
DRYWELL CONTROL AIR
  ATTACHMENTS:         None                                                       (~
Rev. 0
  1.   OPEN the following valves:
Page 1 of 2
        *     0-FCV-84-5, CAD A TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE
LOCATION:
              (Unit 1, Panel 1-9-54)
Unit 1 Control Room
        *     0-FCV-84-16, CAD B TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE
ATTACHMENTS:
              (Unit 1, Panel 1-9-55).
None
  2.   VERIFY 0-PI-84-6, VAPOR A OUTLET PRESS, and 0-PI-84-17 ,
1.
        VAPOR B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100 psig
OPEN the following valves:
        Panel 1-9-54 and Panel 1-9-55).
*
  3.   PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW
0-FCV-84-5, CAD A TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE
        CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-54).
(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-54)
  4.   CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL
*
        AIR, (Panel 1-9-54).
0-FCV-84-16, CAD B TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE
  5.   PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW
(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-55).
        CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).
2.
  6.   CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL
VERIFY 0-PI-84-6, VAPOR A OUTLET PRESS, and 0-PI-84-17,
      AIR (Panel 1-9-55).
VAPOR B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100 psig
  7.   CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,
Panel 1-9-54 and Panel 1-9-55).
        1-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18).
3.
  8.   IF             MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW
                      1-PA-32-31, annunciator is or remains in alarm
CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-54).
                      (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18),
4.
        THEN           DETERMINE which Drywell Control Air header is
CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL
                      depressurized as follows:
AIR, (Panel 1-9-54).
        a.     DISPATCH personnel to Unit 1, RB, EI 565 ft, to MONITOR the
5.
              following indications for low pressure:
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW
              *       1-PI-084-0051, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS
CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).
                      indicator, for CAD A (RB, EI. 565, by Drywell Access
6.
                      Door),
CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL
              *       1-PI-084-0050, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS
AIR (Panel 1-9-55).
                      indicator, for CAD B (RB, EI. 565, left side of 480V RB
7.
                      Vent Board 1B).
CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,
1-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18).
8.
IF
MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,
1-PA-32-31, annunciator is or remains in alarm
(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18),
THEN
DETERMINE which Drywell Control Air header is
depressurized as follows:
a.
DISPATCH personnel to Unit 1, RB, EI 565 ft, to MONITOR the
following indications for low pressure:
*
1-PI-084-0051, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS
indicator, for CAD A (RB, EI. 565, by Drywell Access
Door),
*
1-PI-084-0050, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS
indicator, for CAD B (RB, EI. 565, left side of 480V RB
Vent Board 1B).
(~


      BFN                     Loss Of Control Air           1-AOI-32-2
(
      Unit 1                                                 Rev. 0001
BFN
(                                                            Page 5 of 27
Loss Of Control Air
  2.0 SYMPTOMS (continued)
1-AOI-32-2
      *     REACTOR CHANNEL A(B) AUTO SCRAM annunciator, (1-XA-55-5B,
Unit 1
            Window 1(2)) in alarm .
Rev. 0001
      *     MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW annunciator,
Page 5 of 27
            (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18) in alarm .
2.0
  3.0 AUTOMATIC ACTIONS
SYMPTOMS (continued)
      A.   U-1 TO U-2 CONT AIR CROSSTIE, 1-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE to separate
*
            Units 1 & 2 when control Air Header Control Air Header pressure reaches
REACTOR CHANNEL A(B) AUTO SCRAM annunciator, (1-XA-55-5B,
            65 psig lowering at the valve.
Window 1(2)) in alarm.
      B.   UNIT 2 TO UNIT 3 CONTROL AIR CROSSTIE, 2-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE
*
            to separate Units 2 and 3 when Control Air Header pressure reaches 65 psig
MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW annunciator,
            lowering at the valve.
(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18) in alarm.
      C.   CAD SUPPLY PRESS REGULATOR, 1-PCV-084-0706, will select nitrogen
3.0
            from CAD Tank A at s 75 psig Control Air pressure to supply the following:
AUTOMATIC ACTIONS
            1.   SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE , 1-FSV-064-0020
A.
            2.   SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0021
U-1 TO U-2 CONT AIR CROSSTIE, 1-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE to separate
      D.   INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0033, will select nitrogen from CAD
Units 1 & 2 when control Air Header Control Air Header pressure reaches
            Tank A to supply the following:
65 psig lowering at the valve.
            1.   DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,
B.
                  1-FSV-084-0019
UNIT 2 TO UNIT 3 CONTROL AIR CROSSTIE, 2-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE
            2.   DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0029
to separate Units 2 and 3 when Control Air Header pressure reaches 65 psig
            3.   SUPPR CHMBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0032
lowering at the valve.
      E.   INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0034, will select nitrogen from CAD
C.
            Tank B to supply the following:
CAD SUPPLY PRESS REGULATOR, 1-PCV-084-0706, will select nitrogen
            1.   DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,
from CAD Tank A at s 75 psig Control Air pressure to supply the following:
                  1-FSV-084-0020
1.
            2.   DRYWELL INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0031
SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0020
            3.   SUPPR CHBR INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0034.
2.
SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0021
D.
INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0033, will select nitrogen from CAD
Tank A to supply the following:
1.
DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,
1-FSV-084-0019
2.
DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0029
3.
SUPPR CHMBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0032
E.
INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0034, will select nitrogen from CAD
Tank B to supply the following:
1.
DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,
1-FSV-084-0020
2.
DRYWELL INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0031
3.
SUPPR CHBR INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0034.


        BFN                   Loss Of Control Air             1-AOI-32-2
(
        Unit 1                                                 Rev. 0001
BFN
(                                                              Page 7 of 27
Loss Of Control Air
  4.2     Subsequent Actions (continued)
1-AOI-32-2
                                              NOTE
Unit 1
  CNDS BSTR PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1C, 1-FCV-002-0029A and CNDS BSTR
Rev. 0001
  PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1B, 1-FCV-002-0029B both fail CLOSED on a loss of
Page 7 of 27
  control air.
4.2
          [3] IF there is NOT a flow path for Condensate system, THEN
Subsequent Actions (continued)
                STOP the Condensate Pumps and Condensate Booster
NOTE
                Pumps. REFER TO 1-01-2.                                     o
CNDS BSTR PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1C, 1-FCV-002-0029A and CNDS BSTR
          [4] IF any Outboard MSIV closes, THEN
PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1B, 1-FCV-002-0029B both fail CLOSED on a loss of
                PLACE the associated handswitch on Panel 1-9-3 in the
control air.
                CLOSE position.                                             o
[3]
                                              NOTE
IF there is NOT a flow path for Condensate system, THEN
  RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION, 0-FCV-25-32, fails CLOSED on loss of control air.
STOP the Condensate Pumps and Condensate Booster
          [5] START a High Pressure Fire Pump. REFER TO 0-01-26.           0
Pumps. REFER TO 1-01-2.
          [6] OPEN CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-5, at
[4]
                Panel 1-9-54.                                               0
IF any Outboard MSIV closes, THEN
          [7] OPEN CAD SYSTEM B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-16,
PLACE the associated handswitch on Panel 1-9-3 in the
                at Panel 1-9-55.                                             0
CLOSE position.
          [8] CHECK RCW pump motor amps and PERFORM Steps
NOTE
                4.2[8.1] through 4.2[8.5]to reduce RCW flow:
RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION, 0-FCV-25-32, fails CLOSED on loss of control air.
o
o
[5]
START a High Pressure Fire Pump. REFER TO 0-01-26.
0
[6]
OPEN CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-5, at
Panel 1-9-54.
0
[7]
OPEN CAD SYSTEM B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-16,
at Panel 1-9-55.
0
[8]
CHECK RCW pump motor amps and PERFORM Steps
4.2[8.1] through 4.2[8.5]to reduce RCW flow:


  25. RO 400000A2.02 OO l/C/A/T2G I/RBCCW//400000A2 .02/3.8/4.I/RO/SRO/ll /l6/07 RMS
(
      With Unit 2 operat ing at power, the following changes are observed:
25. RO 400000A2.02 OO l/C/A/T2G I/RBCCW//400000A2 .02/3.8/4.I/RO/SRO/ll/l6/07 RMS
            - RBCCW Temperature lower than normal.
With Unit 2 operating at power, the following changes are observed:
(            - Annunc iator 2-XA -55-4C-6 RBCCW Surge Tank High Level is in alarm.
- RBCCW Temperature lower than normal.
      Wh ich ONE of the following describes a cause for these indications and the corrective action required?
- Annunciator 2-XA-55-4C-6 RBCCW Surge Tank High Level is in alarm.
      A.   Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak into RBCCW. Trip and isolate the Recirculation Pump.
Which ONE of the following describes a cause for these indications and the corrective action required?
      B.oI RCW leak in the RBCCW heat exchanger(s). Remove RBCCW from service follow ing unit
A.
            shutdown .
Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak into RBCCW. Trip and isolate the Recirculation Pump.
      C.   RWCU leak into RBCCW via non-regenerative heat exchanger. Isolate RWCU.
B.oI
      D.   Drywell equipment drain sump heat exchanger leak into RBCCW. Isolate DW Equipment Drain
RCW leak in the RBCCW heat exchanger(s). Remove RBCCW from service following unit
            Sump heat exchanger.
shutdown.
      KIA Statement:
C.
      400000 Component Cooling Water
RWCU leak into RBCCW via non-regenerative heat exchanger. Isolate RWCU.
      A2.02 - Ability to (a) predict the impacts of the follow ing on the CCWS and (b) based on those
D.
      predictions , use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those abnormal
Drywell equipment drain sump heat exchanger leak into RBCCW. Isolate DW Equipment Drain
      operation: High/low surge tank level
Sump heat exchanger.
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
KIA Statement:
      plant conditions to determine the effect of a leak into the RBCCW system and determine which procedure
400000 Component Cooling Water
      addresses this condition .
A2.02 - Ability to (a) predict the impacts of the following on the CCWS and (b) based on those
      References:
predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those abnormal
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemb le,
operation: High/low surge tank level
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
plant conditions to determine the effect of a leak into the RBCCW system and determine which procedure
      0610 NRC Exam
addresses this condition .
      REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
References:
      Plausibility Analysis:
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
      In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the follow ing:
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
      1. Which leak path would provide the indications given in the question stem .
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
      2. What actions would be required to mitigate the problem .
0610 NRC Exam
      NOTE: All distracto rs are plaus ible leak paths into RBCCW but would indicate higher temperatures.
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
      A is incorrect. A Reactor Rec irculation Pump seal cooler leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
Plausibility Analysis:
      B is Correct.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
      C is incorrect. A RWCU leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
1. Which leak path would provide the indications given in the question stem.
      D is incorrect. A DW Equipment Drain Sump HX leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
2. What actions would be required to mitigate the problem .
NOTE: All distractors are plausible leak paths into RBCCW but would indicate higher temperatures.
A is incorrect. A Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
B is Correct.
C is incorrect. A RWCU leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
D is incorrect. A DW Equipment Drain Sump HX leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.


          BFN                             Panel 9-4                    1-ARP-9-4C
(
          Unit 1                           1-XA-55-4C                    Rev. 0015
BFN
(                                                                        Page 12 of 43
Unit 1
                                  SensorlTrip Point:
RBCCW
            RBCCW
SURGE TANK
        SURGE TANK
LEVEL HIGH
        LEVEL HIGH               1-LS-070-0002A          4 Inches Above Center Line of Tank
1-LA-70-2A
          1-LA-70-2A
(Page 1 of 2)
        (Page 1 of 2)
Panel 9-4
  Sensor          RBCCW surge tank on the fourth floor in the M-G set room .
1-XA-55-4C
  Location:
SensorlTrip Point:
  Probable        A. Makeup valve 1-FCV-70-1 open.
1-LS-070-0002A
  Cause:         B. Bypass valve 1-2-1369 leaking.
1-ARP-9-4C
                  <'S . Leak into the system.
Rev. 0015
  Automatic      None
Page 12 of 43
  Action:
4 Inches Above Center Line of Tank
  Operator        A. VERIFY make-up valve 1-FCV-70-1 closed, using RBCCW SYS
  Action:              SURGE TANK FILL VALVE, 1-HS-70-1 , on Panel 1-9-4.                   o
                  B. CHECK RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP, 1-TIS -70-3,
                        indicates water temperature is 100&deg;F or less , on Panel 1-9-4.      o
                  C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level , ensure bypass valve,
                        1-2-1369, is closed and observe sight glass level.                  o
                  D. OPEN surge tank drain valve , 1-70-609, then CLOSE valve when
                        desired level is obtained.                                          o
                  E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma
                        activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.                      o
                  F. CHECK activity reading on RM-90-131D.                                  o
                                            Continued on Next Page
c.
c.
Sensor
Location:
Probable
Cause:
Automatic
Action:
Operator
Action:
RBCCW surge tank on the fourth floor in the M-G set room .
A.
Makeup valve 1-FCV-70-1 open.
B. Bypass valve 1-2-1369 leaking.
<'S. Leak into the system.
None
A. VERIFY make-up valve 1-FCV-70-1 closed, using RBCCW SYS
SURGE TANK FILL VALVE, 1-HS-70-1 , on Panel 1-9-4.
B. CHECK RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP, 1-TIS-70-3,
indicates water temperature is 100&deg;F or less, on Panel 1-9-4.
C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level, ensure bypass valve,
1-2-1369, is closed and observe sight glass level.
D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 1-70-609, then CLOSE valve when
desired level is obtained.
E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma
activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.
F.
CHECK activity reading on RM-90-131D.
Continued on Next Page
o
o
o
o
o
o


          BFN                              Panel 9-4                    1-ARP-9-4C
        Unit 1                          1-XA-55-4C                    Rev. 0015
(                                                                        Page 13 of 43
                      RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A, Window 6
                                                (Page 2 of 2)
  Operator
  Action: (Continued)
                                                    NOTE
  [NERlC] Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 1-RM-90-131
  (Panel 1-9-10) activity (1-RR-90-131/132 Panel 1-9-2) or 1-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature
  (Panel 1-9-21) or lowering of any Recirc pump seal pressure.
                    G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is
                        leaking, THEN
                        PERFORM the following:
                        * DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and at
                            the discretion of the Unit Supervisor, ISOLATE. REFER TO
                            1-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable. COOLDOWN is
                            required to prevent hanger or shock suppressors from exceeding
                            their maximum travel range.                                        0
                        * WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig and at the
                            discretion of the Unit Supervisor, THEN
                            ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the
                            RBCCW PIPING.[IEN 89-054 , GE SIL-459)                              0
                    H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source, if present.      0
  References:      1-45E620-4                    1-47E610-70-1
                    FSAR Section 10.6.4 and 13.6.2
(
(
BFN
Unit 1
Panel 9-4
1-XA-55-4C
1-ARP-9-4C
Rev. 0015
Page 13 of 43
RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A, Window 6
(Page 2 of 2)
Operator
Action:
(Continued)
NOTE
[NERlC] Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 1-RM-90-131
(Panel 1-9-10) activity (1-RR-90-131/132 Panel 1-9-2) or 1-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature
(Panel 1-9-21) or lowering of any Recirc pump seal pressure.
G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is
leaking, THEN
PERFORM the following:
*
DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and at
the discretion of the Unit Supervisor, ISOLATE. REFER TO
1-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable. COOLDOWN is
required to prevent hanger or shock suppressors from exceeding
their maximum travel range.
0
*
WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig and at the
discretion of the Unit Supervisor, THEN
ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the
RBCCW PIPING.[IEN 89-054, GE SIL-459)
0
H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source, if present.
0
(
References:
1-45E620-4
1-47E610-70-1
FSAR Section 10.6.4 and 13.6.2


  26. RO 400000G2.4.31 00 lICfA/T2G 1IRBCCWff4000002.4.3Of/ROfSRO/NO
26. RO 400000G2.4.31 00 lICfA/T2G1IRBCCWff4000002.4.3Of/ROfSRO/NO
      Unit 3 is at 100% rated power with the following indications :
Unit 3 is at 100% rated power with the following indications :
          *   RECIRC PUMP MTR B TEMP HIGH (3-ARP-9-4B W13) in alarm.
*
          *   RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W17) in alarm .
RECIRC PUMP MTR B TEMP HIGH (3-ARP-9-4B W13) in alarm.
          *   RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH (3-ARP-9-4C W6) in alarm .
*
          *   RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W22) in alarm.
RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W17) in alarm.
          *   RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP recorder 3-TR-68-84 is reading 170 of and
*
                rising.
RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH (3-ARP-9-4C W6) in alarm.
          *   RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP 3-TIS-70-3 is reading 140 of and rising.
*
          *   RWCU NON-REGENERATIVE HX DISCH TEMP HIGH in alarm .
RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W22) in alarm.
          *   AREA RADIATION MONITOR RE-90-13 and RE-90-14 are in alarm reading 55 mrlhr and rising.
*
      Which ONE of the following describes the action(s) that should be taken?
RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP recorder 3-TR-68-84 is reading 170 of and
      REFERENCE PROVIDED
rising.
      A. 01 Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump . Commence a
*
            normal shutdown and cooldown in accordance with 3-GOI -100-12A, Unit Shutdown .
RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP 3-TIS-70-3 is reading 140 of and rising.
      B.     Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Enter 3-EOI-1 ,
*
            RPV Control at Step RC-1 .
RWCU NON-REGENERATIVE HX DISCH TEMP HIGH in alarm.
      C.     Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system. Close RBCCW Sectionalizing Valve 3-FCV-70-48
*
            to isolate non-essential loads and maximize cooling to 3B Recirc . Pump . EOI entry is not required.
AREA RADIATION MONITOR RE-90-13 and RE-90-14 are in alarm reading 55 mrlhr and rising.
      D.     Enter 3-EOI-3 , Secondary Containment Control. Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system.
Which ONE of the following describes the action(s) that should be taken?
            Commence a normal shutdown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .
REFERENCE PROVIDED
      KIA Statement:
A. 01
      400000 Component Cooling Water
Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Commence a
      2.4.31 - Emergency Procedures I Plan Knowledge of annunciators alarms and indications, and use of the
normal shutdown and cooldown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .
      response instructions.
B.
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Enter 3-EOI-1,
      plant conditions to determine the corrective actions required due to an emergency involving RBCCW
RPV Control at Step RC-1.
      based on annunciators and indications.
C.
      References:       3-EOI-3 flowchart, 3-ARP 9-3 and 3-ARP-9-4
Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system. Close RBCCW Sectionalizing Valve 3-FCV-70-48
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
to isolate non-essential loads and maximize cooling to 3B Recirc. Pump. EOI entry is not required.
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
D.
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
Enter 3-EOI-3 , Secondary Containment Control. Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system.
(     0610 NRC Exam
Commence a normal shutdown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .
KIA Statement:
400000 Component Cooling Water
2.4.31 - Emergency Procedures I Plan Knowledge of annunciators alarms and indications, and use of the
response instructions.
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the corrective actions required due to an emergency involving RBCCW
based on annunciators and indications.
References:
3-EOI-3 flowchart, 3-ARP 9-3 and 3-ARP-9-4
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
(
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: 3-EOI-3 flowchart
REFERENCE PROVIDED: 3-EOI-3 flowchart
  Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
(
  1. EOI Entry is required solely based on ARM alarms.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  2. Location of the leak is from the 3B Recic Pump.
1. EOI Entry is required solely based on ARM alarms.
  3. RWCU temperature indications are due to insufficient cooling by RBCCW, not a RWCU leak.
2. Location of the leak is from the 3B Recic Pump.
  4. Appropriate actions per 3-EOI-3 are to isolate the leak and monitor radiation levels.
3. RWCU temperature indications are due to insufficient cooling by RBCCW, not a RWCU leak.
  5. Justification for Unit Shudwon and Cooldown are due to the Recirc Loop being isolated at rated
4. Appropriate actions per 3-EOI-3 are to isolate the leak and monitor radiation levels.
      temperature and pressure (pipe hanger and support issue), and NOT Directed by 3-EOI-3.
5. Justification for Unit Shudwon and Cooldown are due to the Recirc Loop being isolated at rated
  A is correct.
temperature and pressure (pipe hanger and support issue), and NOT Directed by 3-EOI-3.
  B is incorrect. Entering 3-EOI-1 to initiate a scram is NOT required until radiation levels approach 1000
A is correct.
  mr/hr in any area. This is plausible becuase the location of the leak and required isolation are correct.
B is incorrect. Entering 3-EOI-1 to initiate a scram is NOT required until radiation levels approach 1000
  C is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the
mr/hr in any area. This is plausible becuase the location of the leak and required isolation are correct.
  temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa . If RWCU was the leak location, the
C is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the
  RBCCW temperature would not be high enough to provide the given indications. The leak would have to
temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. If RWCU was the leak location, the
  have occurred in the NRHX which is below the indicated RBCCW temperature.
RBCCW temperature would not be high enough to provide the given indications. The leak would have to
  D is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the
have occurred in the NRHX which is below the indicated RBCCW temperature.
  temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa . In addition to the justification above,
D is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the
  commencing a shutdown in accordance with 3-EOI-3 is not appropriate until ARMs indicate greater than
temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. In addition to the justification above,
  1000 mr/hr.
commencing a shutdown in accordance with 3-EOI-3 is not appropriate until ARMs indicate greater than
1000 mr/hr.
(
(


                                                                                                    OPL 171.047
                                                                                                    Revision 12
                                                                                                    Appendix C
                                                                                                    Page 35 of 41
(
(
  DEMIN
OPL171.047
  WATER ----.,r-I~>l<lh
Revision 12
  MAKEUP
Appendix C
        DRW
Page 35 of 41
                                                                                        RCW
DEMIN
                                                        *,II1II""* *""                 TCV'S
WATER ----.,r-I~>l<lh
                                                                                                                RCW
MAKEUP
                                                        I&lfiI~~**~~f:J---+-"OUTLET
DRW
              RBCCW
.................. ................
              RETURN  ",--====-__  J    601                                           RCW
RCW
              HEADER
t-_........U2
                                          U2-11.....-1     .""",,~n                    TCV'S
TCV'S
                                              623
RCW
                                              626
.""",,~n TCV'S
                                                                .................. ................
RCW
                                            0-70-607
*,II1II""**"" TCV'S
            CHEMICAL
RCW
              FEED                                                                      RCW
I&lfiI~~**~~f:J---+-"OUTLET
                                                          t-_........
626
                                                                633
623
                                                                            U2        TCV'S
0-70-607
                                                          ' - -........
601
                                                                638          U3
U2-11.....-1
                                                                                                        RBCCW
RBCCW
                                                                                                        SUPPLY
RETURN",--====-__J
                                                                                                        HEADER
HEADER
                                                            67                      69
CHEMICAL
                                                      U2                 U3
FEED
                                                            68                      70
633
                              TP-1: RBCCW SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM
RBCCW
SUPPLY
HEADER
70
69
638
U3
67
68
'--........ U3
U2
TP-1: RBCCW SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM


          8FN                             Panel 9-4                     3-ARP-9-48
(
        Unit 3                          3-XA-55-48                     Rev. 0036
8FN
(                                                                        Page 17 of 45
Unit 3
                                SensorlTrip Point:         Alarm is from 3-TR-68-84, Panel 3-9-2
Panel 9-4
          RECIRC                3-TE-68-73A RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG UPPER FACE (190&deg;F)
3-XA-55-48
      PUMP MTR B                3-TE-68-73C RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG LOWER FACE (190&deg;F)
3-ARP-9-48
        TEMP HIGH                3-TE-68-73E RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-UPPER GUIDE BRG (190&deg;F)
Rev. 0036
        3-TA-68-84              3-TE-68-73N RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-LOWER GUIDE BRG (190&deg;F)
Page 17 of 45
                                3-TE-68-73G RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING A (216&deg;F)
RECIRC
                                3-TE-68-73J RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING B (216&deg;F)
PUMP MTR B
        (Page 1 of 1)            3-TE-68-73L RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING C (216&deg;F)
TEMP HIGH
                                3-TE-68-73T RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.2 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
3-TA-68-84
                                3-TE-68-73U RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.1 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
(Page 1 of 1)
                                3-TE-68-67 RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG (140&deg;F)
SensorlTrip Point:
                                3-TE-68-70 RECIRC PMPMTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM BRG (140&deg;F)
Alarm is from 3-TR-68-84, Panel 3-9-2
  Sensor         Temperature elements are located on recirculation pump motor, Elevation 563.12,
3-TE-68-73A RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG UPPER FACE (190&deg;F)
  Location:      Unit 3 drywell.
3-TE-68-73C RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG LOWER FACE (190&deg;F)
  Probable        A.   Possible bearing failure.
3-TE-68-73E RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-UPPER GUIDE BRG (190&deg;F)
  Cause:          B.   Possible motor overload.
3-TE-68-73N RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-LOWER GUIDE BRG (190&deg;F)
                  C.   Insufficient cooling water.
3-TE-68-73G RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING A (216&deg;F)
                  D.   Possible seal failure.
3-TE-68-73J RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING B (216&deg;F)
                  E.   High drywell temperature.
3-TE-68-73L RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING C (216&deg;F)
  Automatic      None
3-TE-68-73T RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.2 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
  Action:
3-TE-68-73U RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.1 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
  Operator        A. . CHECK following on Panel 3-9-4:                                             o
3-TE-68-67 RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG (140&deg;F)
  Action:              * RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP temperature indicating
3-TE-68-70 RECIRC PMPMTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM BRG (140&deg;F)
                          switch, 3-TIS-70-3 normal (summer 70-95&deg;F, winter 60-80&deg;F).             o
Sensor
                      * RBCCW PRI CTMT OUTLET handswitch, 3-HS-70-47A
Location:
                          (3-FCV-70-47) OPEN.                                                     o
Probable
                  B. CHECK the temperature of the cooling water leaving the seal and
Cause:
                      bearing coolers < 140&deg;F on RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND
Automatic
                      BRG TEMP temperature recorder, 3-TR-68-84 on Panel 3-9-21 .                 0
Action:
                  C. LOWER recire pump speed until Bearing and/or Winding
Temperature elements are located on recirculation pump motor, Elevation 563.12,
                      temperatures are below the alarm setpoint.                                 0
Unit 3 drywell.
                  D. CONTACT Site Engineering to PERFORM a complete assessment
A. Possible bearing failure.
                      and monitoring of all seal conditions particularly seal leakage,
B. Possible motor overload.
                      temperature, and pressure of all stages for Recirc Pump seal
C. Insufficient cooling water.
                      temperatures in excess of 180&deg;F.                                           0
D. Possible seal failure.
  References:     3-45E620-5                     3-47E610-68-1                 Tech Spec 3.4.1
E. High drywell temperature.
                  GE 731E320RE                    3-SIMI-68B                    FSAR Section 13.6.2
None
Operator
Action:
A. . CHECK following on Panel 3-9-4:
*
RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP temperature indicating
switch, 3-TIS-70-3 normal (summer 70-95&deg;F, winter 60-80&deg;F).
*
RBCCW PRI CTMT OUTLET handswitch, 3-HS-70-47A
(3-FCV-70-47) OPEN.
o
o
o
B. CHECK the temperature of the cooling water leaving the seal and
bearing coolers < 140&deg;F on RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND
BRG TEMP temperature recorder, 3-TR-68-84 on Panel 3-9-21.
0
C. LOWER recire pump speed until Bearing and/or Winding
temperatures are below the alarm setpoint.
0
D. CONTACT Site Engineering to PERFORM a complete assessment
and monitoring of all seal conditions particularly seal leakage,
temperature, and pressure of all stages for Recirc Pump seal
temperatures in excess of 180&deg;F.
0
References:
3-45E620-5
GE 731E320RE
3-47E610-68-1
3-SIMI-68B
Tech Spec 3.4.1
FSAR Section 13.6.2


          BFN                           Panel 9-3                   3-ARP-9-3A
(
        Unit3                          3-XA-55-3A                   Rev. 0036
BFN
(                                                                    Page 25 of 51
Unit3
                                SensorlTrip Point:
RBCCW EFFLUENT
    RBCCW EFFLUENT
RADIATION
        RADIATION
HIGH
            HIGH
3-RA-90-131 A
                                                        ill                    HI-HI
Panel 9-3
                                RE-90-131D              (NOTE 2)               (NOTE 2)
3-XA-55-3A
      3-RA-90-131 A
SensorlTrip Point:
                              Hi alarm from recorder
RE-90-131D
                              Hi-Hi alarm from drawer
ill
        (Page 1 of 2)
(NOTE 2)
                              (2)    Chemlab should be contacted for current setpoints per 0-TI-45.
3-ARP-9-3A
  Sensor         RE-90-131A RBCCW HX Rx Bldg, EI593, R-20 S-L1NE
Rev. 0036
  Location:
Page 25 of 51
  Probable        HX tube leak into RBCCW system.
HI-HI
  Cause:
(NOTE 2)
  Automatic      None
(Page 1 of 2)
  Action:
Hi alarm from recorder
  Operator        A. DETERMINE cause of alarm by observing following:
Hi-Hi alarm from drawer
  Action:            1. RBCCWand RCW EFFLUENT RADIATION recorder,
(2)
                          3-RR-90-131/132 Red pen on Panel 3-9-2.                               o
Chemlab should be contacted for current setpoints per 0-TI-45.
                      2. RBCCW EFFLUENT OFFLINE RAD MON, 3-RM-90-131D on
Sensor
                          Panel 3-9-10.                                                         o
Location:
                  B. NOTIFY Chemistry to sample RBCCW for total gamma activity to
Probable
                      verify condition.                                                         0
Cause:
                  C. START an immediate investigation to determine if source of leak is
Automatic
                      RWCU Non-regenerative, Fuel Pool Cooling, Reactor Water Sample
Action:
                      or RWCU Recirc Pump 3A or 3B Seal Water heat exchanger(s).               0
RE-90-131A RBCCW HX Rx Bldg, EI593, R-20 S-L1NE
                  D. (NERlC] CHECK Following for indication of Reactor Recirculation
HX tube leak into RBCCW system.
                      Pump Seal Heat Exchanger leak:
None
                      1. LOWERING in reactor Recirculation pump 3A(3B) NO.1 or 2
Operator
                          SEAL, 3-PI-68-64A or 3-PI-68-63A (3-PI-68-76A or 3-PI-68-75A)
Action:
                          on Panel 3-9-4.                                                       0
A.
                      2. Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-54, on
DETERMINE cause of alarm by observing following:
                          RECIRC PMP MTR 3A WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature
1.
                          recorder, 3-TR-68-58 , on Panel 3-9-21.                               0
RBCCWand RCW EFFLUENT RADIATION recorder,
                      3. Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-67, on
3-RR-90-131/132 Red pen on Panel 3-9-2.
                          RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature
2.
                          recorder, 3-TR-68-84, on Panel 3-9-21.                               0
RBCCW EFFLUENT OFFLINE RAD MON, 3-RM-90-131D on
                                        Continued on Next Page
Panel 3-9-10.
o
o
B. NOTIFY Chemistry to sample RBCCW for total gamma activity to
verify condition.
0
C. START an immediate investigation to determine if source of leak is
RWCU Non-regenerative, Fuel Pool Cooling, Reactor Water Sample
or RWCU Recirc Pump 3A or 3B Seal Water heat exchanger(s).
0
D.
(NERlC] CHECK Following for indication of Reactor Recirculation
Pump Seal Heat Exchanger leak:
1.
LOWERING in reactor Recirculation pump 3A(3B) NO.1 or 2
SEAL, 3-PI-68-64A or 3-PI-68-63A (3-PI-68-76A or 3-PI-68-75A)
on Panel 3-9-4.
0
2.
Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-54, on
RECIRC PMP MTR 3A WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature
recorder, 3-TR-68-58, on Panel 3-9-21.
0
3.
Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-67, on
RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature
recorder, 3-TR-68-84, on Panel 3-9-21.
0
Continued on Next Page


          BFN                             Panel 9-3                   3-ARP-9-3A
(
        Unit 3                          3-XA-55-3A                   Rev. 0036
BFN
(                                                                      Page 26 of 51
Unit 3
                RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-131A, Window 17
Panel 9-3
                                                (Page 2 of 2)
3-XA-55-3A
  Operator
3-ARP-9-3A
  Action: (Continued)
Rev. 0036
                  E. IF it is determ ined the source of leakage is from Reactor Recirc
Page 26 of 51
                      Pump A(B) , THEN
RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-131A, Window 17
                      1. ISOLATE Reactor Recirculation Loop A(B) per 3-01-68, as
(Page 2 of 2)
                          applicable.                                                       0
Operator
                                                      NOTE
Action: (Continued)
  Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors from exceeding their maximum travel
E. IF it is determ ined the source of leakage is from Reactor Recirc
  range.
Pump A(B), THEN
                      2. WHEN primary system pressure is less than 125 psig, THEN
1.
                          ISOLATE RBCCW System to preclude damage to RBCCW
ISOLATE Reactor Recirculation Loop A(B) per 3-01-68, as
                          piping. [lEN 89-054 , GE SIL-459 )                               0
applicable.
  References:     3-45E620-3                       3-47E610-90-3           GE 3-729E814-3
0
NOTE
Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors from exceeding their maximum travel
range.
2.
WHEN primary system pressure is less than 125 psig, THEN
ISOLATE RBCCW System to preclude damage to RBCCW
piping.
[lEN 89-054 , GE SIL-459)
0
References:
3-45E620-3
3-47E610-90-3
GE 3-729E814-3


        BFN                           Panel 9-3                      3-ARP-9-3A
BFN
      Unit3                        3-XA-55-3A                     Rev. 0036
Unit3
                                                                    Page 32 of 51
RX BLDG AREA
                            SensorlTrip Point:
RADIATION
    RX BLDG AREA
HIGH
      RADIATION            RI-90-4A             RI-90-23A            For setpoints REFER TO
3-RA-90-1D
          HIGH                                                        3-SIMI-90B.
(Page 1 of 2)
                            RI-90-8A            RI-90-24A
Panel 9-3
      3-RA-90-1D
3-XA-55-3A
                            RI-90-9A            RI-90-25A
SensorlTrip Point:
                            RI-90-13A            RI-90-26A
RI-90-4A
                            RI-90-14A            RI-90-27A
RI-90-8A
      (Page 1 of 2)
RI-90-9A
                            RI-90-20A            RI-90-28A
RI-90-13A
                            RI-90-21A            RI-90-29A
RI-90-14A
                            RI-90-22A
RI-90-20A
Sensor         RE-90-4         MG set area               Rx Bldg EI. 639             R-17 Q-L1NE
RI-90-21A
Location:       RE-90-8         Main Control Room         Rx Bldg EI. 617             R-16 R-L1NE
RI-90-22A
                RE-90-9         Clean-up System           Rx Bldg EI. 621             R-16 T-L1NE
RI-90-23A
                RE-90-13         North Clean-up Sys.       Rx Bldg EI. 593             R-16 P-L1NE
RI-90-24A
                RE-90-14         South Clean-up Sys.       Rx Bldg EI. 593             R-16 S-L1NE
RI-90-25A
                RE-90-20         CRD-HCU West             Rx Bldg EI. 565             R-16 R-L1NE
RI-90-26A
                RE-90-21         CRD-HCU East             Rx Bldg EI. 565             R-20 R-L1NE
RI-90-27A
                RE-90-22         Tip Room                 Rx Bldg EI. 565             R-19 P-L1NE
RI-90-28A
                RE-90-23         Tip Drive                 Rx Bldg EI. 565             R-19 P-L1NE
RI-90-29A
                RE-90-24         HPCI Room*               Rx Bldg EI. 519             R-21 U-L1NE
3-ARP-9-3A
                RE-90-25         RHR West                 Rx Bldg EI. 519             R-16 U-L1NE
Rev. 0036
                RE-90-26         Core Spray-RCIC           Rx Bldg EI. 519             R-16 N-L1NE
Page 32 of 51
                RE-90-27         Core Spray               Rx Bldg EI. 519             R-20 N-L1NE
For setpoints REFER TO
                RE-90-28         RHR East                 Rx Bldg EI. 519             R-20 U-L1NE
3-SIMI-90B.
                RE-90-29         Suppression Pool .       Rx Bldg EI. 519             R-19 U-L1NE
Sensor
                *   Due to the location of the Rad Monitor in relation to the Test line in the HPCI
RE-90-4
                    Quad, the HPCI Room Rad Alarm may be received when the HPCI Flow test
MG set area
                    is in progress.
Rx Bldg EI. 639
Probable       Radiation levels have risen above alarm set point. HPCI Flow Rate Surveillance in
R-17 Q-L1NE
Cause:         Progress.
Location:
Automatic       None
RE-90-8
Main Control Room
Rx Bldg EI. 617
R-16 R-L1NE
RE-90-9
Clean-up System
Rx Bldg EI. 621
R-16 T-L1NE
RE-90-13
North Clean-up Sys.
Rx Bldg EI. 593
R-16 P-L1NE
RE-90-14
South Clean-up Sys.
Rx Bldg EI. 593
R-16 S-L1NE
RE-90-20
CRD-HCU West
Rx Bldg EI. 565
R-16 R-L1NE
RE-90-21
CRD-HCU East
Rx Bldg EI. 565
R-20 R-L1NE
RE-90-22
Tip Room
Rx Bldg EI. 565
R-19 P-L1NE
RE-90-23
Tip Drive
Rx Bldg EI. 565
R-19 P-L1NE
RE-90-24
HPCI Room*
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-21 U-L1NE
RE-90-25
RHR West
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-16 U-L1NE
RE-90-26
Core Spray-RCIC
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-16 N-L1NE
RE-90-27
Core Spray
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-20 N-L1NE
RE-90-28
RHR East
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-20 U-L1NE
RE-90-29
Suppression Pool .
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-19 U-L1NE
*
Due to the location of the Rad Monitor in relation to the Test line in the HPCI
Quad, the HPCI Room Rad Alarm may be received when the HPCI Flow test
is in progress.
Probable
Cause:
Automatic
Action:
Action:
                                      Continued on Next Page
Radiation levels have risen above alarm set point. HPCI Flow Rate Surveillance in
Progress.
None
Continued on Next Page


          BFN                       Panel 9-3                     3-ARP-9-3A
(
        Unit3                      3-XA-55-3A                     Rev. 0036 *
BFN
(                                                                  Page 33 of 51
Unit3
                RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D, Window 22
Panel 9-3
                                          (Page 2 of 2)
3-XA-55-3A
  Operator    A. DETERMINE area with high radiation level on Panel 3-9-11. (Alarm
3-ARP-9-3A
  Action:        on Panel 3-9-11 will automatically reset if radiation level lowers
Rev. 0036 *
                below setpoint.)                                                     o
Page 33 of 51
              B. IF the alarm is from the HPCI Room while Flow testing is being
Operator
                performed, THEN
Action:
                REQUEST personnel at the HPCI Quad to validate conditions.           o
RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D, Window 22
              C. NOTIFY RADCON.                                                       o
(Page 2 of 2)
              D. IF the TSC is NOT manned and a "VALID" radiological condition
A. DETERMINE area with high radiation level on Panel 3-9-11. (Alarm
                exists ., THEN
on Panel 3-9-11 will automatically reset if radiation level lowers
                USE public address system to evacuate area where high airborne
below setpoint.)
                conditions exist                                                     o
B. IF the alarm is from the HPCI Room while Flow testing is being
              E. IF the TSC is manned and a "VALID" radiological condition exists,
performed, THEN
                THEN
REQUEST personnel at the HPCI Quad to validate conditions.
                REQUEST the TSC to evacuate non-essential personnel from
C. NOTIFY RADCON.
                affected areas.                                                       o
D. IF the TSC is NOT manned and a "VALID" radiological condition
              F. MONITOR other parameters providing input to this annunciator
exists., THEN
                frequently as these parameters will be masked from alarming while
USE public address system to evacuate area where high airborne
                this alarm is sealed in.                                             o
conditions exist
              G. IF a CREV initiation is received, THEN
E. IF the TSC is manned and a "VALID" radiological condition exists,
                1. VERIFY CREV A(B) Flow is ~ 2700 CFM, and ~ 3300 CFM as
THEN
                    indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) within 5 hours of the CREV
REQUEST the TSC to evacuate non-essential personnel from
                    initiation. [BFPER 03-017922]                                     o
affected areas.
                2. IF CREV A(B) Flow is NOT ~ 2700 CFM, and s 3300 CFM as
F.
                    indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) THEN
MONITOR other parameters providing input to this annunciator
                      PERFORM the following : (Otherwise N/A)
frequently as these parameters will be masked from alarming while
                    [BFPER 03-017922]
this alarm is sealed in.
                      a. STOP the operating CREV per 0-01-31.                         o
G. IF a CREV initiation is received, THEN
                      b. START the standby CREV per 0-01-31.                           o
1.
              H. IF alarm is due to malfunction, THEN
VERIFY CREV A(B) Flow is ~ 2700 CFM, and ~ 3300 CFM as
                REFER TO 0-01-55.                                                     o
indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) within 5 hours of the CREV
              I. ENTER 3-EOI-3 Flowchart.                                             o
initiation. [BFPER 03-017922]
              J. REFER TO 3-AOI-79-1 or 3-A01-79-2 if applicable.                     o
2.
  References: 3-45E620-3                   3-45E61 0-90-1               GE 730E356-1
IF CREV A(B) Flow is NOT ~ 2700 CFM, and s 3300 CFM as
indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) THEN
PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)
[BFPER 03-017922]
a.
STOP the operating CREV per 0-01-31.
b.
START the standby CREV per 0-01-31.
H. IF alarm is due to malfunction, THEN
REFER TO 0-01-55.
I.
ENTER 3-EOI-3 Flowchart.
J.
REFER TO 3-AOI-79-1 or 3-A01-79-2 if applicable.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
References:
3-45E620-3
3-45E610-90-1
GE 730E356-1


          BFN                           Panel 9-4                     3-ARP-9-4C
(
        Unit 3                         3-XA-55-4C                     Rev. 0028
BFN
(                                                                      Page 12 of 44
Unit 3
                                SensorlTrip Point:
RBCCW
          RBCCW
SURGE TANK
      SURGE TANK
LEVEL HIGH
        LEVEL HIGH              3-LS-070-0002A            4 inches above center line of tank
3-LA-70-2A
        3-LA-70-2A
(Page 1 of 2)
        (Page 1 of 2)
Panel 9-4
  Sensor          RBCCW surge tank in the MG set room EI 639'.
3-XA-55-4C
  Location:
SensorlTrip Point:
  Probable        A. Makeup valve, 3-FCV-70-1, open.
3-LS-070-0002A
  Cause:          B. Bypass valve 3-BYV-002-1369 leaking.
3-ARP-9-4C
                  C. Leak into the system.
Rev. 0028
  Automatic      None
Page 12 of 44
  Action:
4 inches above center line of tank
  Operator        A. CHECK make-up valve 3-FCV-70-1, 3-HS-70-1, CLOSED on
Sensor
  Action:            Panel 3-9-4.                                                           o
Location:
                  B. CHECK RBCCW system water leaving the RBCCW system heat
Probable
                      exchangers is 100&deg;F or less on 3-TI-70-3, Panel 3-9-4.                 n
Cause:
                  C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level and to ensure
Automatic
                      3-BYV-002-1369, FCV-70-1 BYPASS VALVE is CLOSED.
Action:
                      OBSERVE sight glass level.                                             o
Operator
                  D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 3-DRV-070-0609. CLOSE valve
Action:
                      when desired level is obtained.                                         o
RBCCW surge tank in the MG set room EI 639'.
                  E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma
A. Makeup valve, 3-FCV-70-1, open.
                      activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.                         o
B. Bypass valve 3-BYV-002-1369 leaking.
                  F. CHECK activity reading on 3-RM-90-131 Band 3-RM-90-131 D.               o
C. Leak into the system.
                                        Continued on Next Page
None
A. CHECK make-up valve 3-FCV-70-1, 3-HS-70-1, CLOSED on
Panel 3-9-4.
B. CHECK RBCCW system water leaving the RBCCW system heat
exchangers is 100&deg;F or less on 3-TI-70-3, Panel 3-9-4.
C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level and to ensure
3-BYV-002-1369, FCV-70-1 BYPASS VALVE is CLOSED.
OBSERVE sight glass level.
D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 3-DRV-070-0609. CLOSE valve
when desired level is obtained.
E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma
activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.
F. CHECK activity reading on 3-RM-90-131 Band 3-RM-90-131 D.
Continued on Next Page
o
n
o
o
oo


          BFN                           Panel 9-4                     3-ARP-9-4C
(
        Unit 3                          3-XA-55-4C                     Rev. 0028
BFN
(                                                                        Page 13 of 44
Unit 3
                      RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 3-LA-70-2A, Window 6
Panel 9-4
                                                (Page 2"of 2)
3-XA-55-4C
  Operator
3-ARP-9-4C
  Action: (Continued)
Rev. 0028
                                                    NOTE
Page 13 of 44
  [NER/C) Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 3-RM-90-131
RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 3-LA-70-2A, Window 6
  (Panel 3-9-10) activity (3-RR-90-131 /132, Panel 3-9-2 or 3-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature,
(Page 2"of 2)
  Panel 3-9-21) or a lowering in any Recirc pump seal pressure .
Operator
                    G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is
Action: (Continued)
                        leaking, THEN
NOTE
                        PERFORM the following:
[NER/C) Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 3-RM-90-131
                        * DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and
(Panel 3-9-10) activity (3-RR-90-131 /132, Panel 3-9-2 or 3-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature,
                            ISOLATE. REFER TO 3-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable.
Panel 3-9-21) or a lowering in any Recirc pump seal pressure.
                            Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors
G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is
                            from exceeding their maximum travel range.                         0
leaking, THEN
                        * WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig, THEN
PERFORM the following:
                            ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the
*
                            RBCCW piping. [IEN89 -054 , GE SIL-459)                             0
DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and
                    H. START select ive valving to determine in-leakage source , if present.
ISOLATE. REFER TO 3-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable.
  References:       3-45N620-4                   3-47E610-70-1              3-47E822-1
Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors
                    FSAR Sections 10.6.4 and 13.6.2
from exceeding their maximum travel range.
0
*
WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig, THEN
ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the
RBCCW piping.
[IEN89-054, GE SIL-459)
0
H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source , if present.
References:
3-45N620-4
3-47E610-70-1
FSAR Sections 10.6.4 and 13.6.2
3-47E822-1


                                                                              OPL 171.034
                                                                              Revision 11
                                                                              Append ix C
                                                                              Page 30 of 30
(
(
                                            EOI - 3
EOI - 3
                                          TABLE 4
OPL171.034
                SECONDARY CONTAINMENT AREA RADIATION
Revision 11
                      APPLICABLE         MAX NORMAL   MAX SAFE     POTENTIAL
Appendix C
          AREA         RADIATION             VALUE     VALUE       ISOLATION
Page 30 of 30
                      INDICATORS             MRIHR     MR/HR         SOURCES
TABLE 4
  RHR SYS I PUMPS     90-25A             A LARMED      1000     FCV -74-47, 48
SECONDARY CONTAINMENT AREA RADIATION
  RHR SYS II PUMPS                       ALARMED       1000     FCV-74 -47,48
APPLICABLE
                      90-2BA
MAX NORMAL
  HPCI ROOM                                                      FCV -73 -2, 3, 81
MAX SAFE
                      90-24A              A LARM ED      1000
POTENTIAL
                                                                  FCV-73- 44
AREA
  CS SYS I PUMPS                                         1000
RADIATION
                      90-26A             ALARMED                 FCV -71 -2, 3, 39
VALUE
  RCIC ROOM
VALUE
  CS SYS II PUMPS     90-27A             A LAR MED     1000     NO'l E
ISOLATION
                                                                  FCV-73 -2 , 3 , 81
INDICATORS
  TORUS                                  A LAR M ED    1000
MRIHR
                      90-29A                                     FCV-74 -47 , 48
MR/HR
  GENERAL AREA
SOURCES
                                                                  FCV-71 -2, 3
RHR SYS I PUMPS
  RB EL 565 W         90-20A             ALARMED       1000     FCV -69-1, 2, 12
90-25A
                                                                  SD V V ENTS & DRAI NS
ALARMED
  RB EL 565 E         90-2 1A            ALARMED       1000     SDV VENTS & DRAI NS
1000
  RB EL 565 NE                           AL A RM ED     1000     NO'l E
FCV-74-47, 48
                      90-23A
RHR SYS II PUMPS
  TIP ROOM           90-22A             ALAR MED       100 ,000 TI P BAL L VALVE
90-2BA
  RB EL 593                               A LA RM ED    1000     FCV -74 -47 ,48
ALARMED
                      90-13A, 14A
1000
  RB EL 621                              ALARMED       1000     FCV-43-13 , 14
FCV-74-47,48
                      90-9A
HPCI ROOM
  REC IRC MG SETS     90-4A               ALARMED       1000     NO'lE
90-24A
  REFUEL FLOOR       90-1A , 2A, 3A     ALARMED       1000     NO'l E
A LARMED
                                    TP -7 EOI-3 TABLE 4
1000
FCV -73 -2, 3, 81
FCV-73-44
CS SYS I PUMPS
90-26A
ALARMED
1000
RCIC ROOM
FCV-71 -2, 3, 39
CS SYS II PUMPS
90-27A
ALAR MED
1000
NO'l E
TORUS
FCV-73 -2, 3, 81
90-29A
ALAR MED
1000
FCV-74 -47, 48
GENERAL AREA
FCV-71 -2, 3
RB EL 565 W
90-20A
ALARMED
1000
FCV-69-1, 2, 12
SDV VENTS & DRAI NS
RB EL 565 E
90-21A
ALARMED
1000
SDV VENTS & DRAINS
RB EL 565 NE
90-23A
ALARM ED
1000
NO'l E
TIP ROOM
90-22A
ALAR MED
100 ,000
TI P BAL L VALVE
RB EL 593
90-13A, 14A
A LARMED
1000
FCV-74 -47 ,48
RB EL 621
90-9A
ALARMED
1000
FCV-43-13, 14
RECIRC MG SETS
90-4A
ALARMED
1000
NO'lE
REFUEL FLOOR
90-1A, 2A, 3A
ALARMED
1000
NO'lE
TP -7 EOI-3 TABLE 4


E MINATION
E
  REFERENCE
MINATION
REFERENCE
.PROVIDED TO
.PROVIDED TO
  CANDIDATE
CANDIDATE


(
(
      -ow
~-oau
      C")
C")*-ow
        *
~
                                          ~
il,H-t1UIIrrrn
                                          il,H-t1UIIrrrn
I
                                          I
SlH"ttrr-r<lI I I I
                                          SlH"tt rr-r<l I I I I
~
  -
1!l1 !!
  ~
!!
  oau
I
            ~      1!l1 !! !! I
-! I
          -! I
* i ,I: .
          iii I
iiiI III! iii!
                  III!
II 1 II
                            * i ,I: II.
I
                          iii! II 1
orII
            I I iI iii I 1111 I   or
I iI iiiI 1111 I
                                  II
I
                    I          r   It ..
r
                  I IIi
It ..
                I I'            I'"III!
I I I!!
                      I!! I II II I
I I I'"III!
                                                                C")
I' IIi I I I
            I                                                    -*
I
                                                                ow
I
C")*-ow


  27. RO 201003K3.03 OOl/MEM/TIG2/85-3/Bl1/201003K3.03/3.6/3.7/RO/SR0/1 1/l6/07 RMS
      Given the following plant conditions :
          *    AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure, directs a manual scram based on low reactor pressure.
(
(
      Which ONE of the following PROCEDURAL reactor pressure limits should be adhered to in this case and
27. RO 201003K3.03 OOl/MEM/TIG2/85-3/Bl1/201003K3.03/3.6/3.7/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS
      WHY?
Given the following plant conditions:
      A.     980 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due
*
            to the loss of accumulators.
AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure, directs a manual scram based on low reactor pressure.
      B.oI   900 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due
Which ONE of the following PROCEDURAL reactor pressure limits should be adhered to in this case and
            to the loss of accumulators.
WHY?
      C.     445 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure required to lift a control rod
A.
            blade.
980 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due
      D.     800 psig reactor pressure, because this is the Technical Specification pressure for scramming
to the loss of accumulators.
            control rods for scram time testing .
B.oI
      KIA Statement:
900 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due
      201003 Control Rod and Drive Mechanism
to the loss of accumulators.
      K3.03 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the CONTROL ROD AND DRIVE
C.
      MECHANISM will have on following : Shutdown margin
445 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure required to lift a control rod
      KIA Justification: Th is question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
blade.
      knowledge of CRD mechanism limitations and the basis for that limitation related to the ability to effect
D.
      and maintain shutdown margin.
800 psig reactor pressure, because this is the Technical Specification pressure for scramming
      References:     1/2/3-AOI-85-3, OPL 171.005, OPL171.006
control rods for scram time testing .
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requ irement to recall
KIA Statement:
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
201003 Control Rod and Drive Mechanism
      06 10 NRC Exam
K3.03 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the CONTROL ROD AND DRIVE
MECHANISM will have on following : Shutdown margin
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of CRD mechanism limitations and the basis for that limitation related to the ability to effect
and maintain shutdown margin.
References:
1/2/3-AOI-85-3, OPL 171.005, OPL171.006
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
  Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
(
  1. The minimum pressure allowed by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  2. The basis for that minimum pressure.
1. The minimum pressure allowed by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
  A is incorrect. This is plausible because 980 psig is the setpoint for the Low Accumulator Pressure
2. The basis for that minimum pressure.
  alarm.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because 980 psig is the setpoint for the Low Accumulator Pressure
  B is correct.
alarm.
  C is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure
B is correct.
  specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure
  D is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure
specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
  specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure
specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.


                                                  OPL 171.006
OPL171.006
                                                  Revision 9
Revision 9
                                                  Page 17 of 60
Page 17 of 60
C       (a)   A specific pattern of control rod
C
              withdrawal or insertion
(a)
        (b)   Written step-by-step path used by
A specific pattern of control rod
              the operator in establishing the
withdrawal or insertion
              expected rod pattern and flux
(b)
              shape at rated power
Written step-by-step path used by
        (c)   Deviation from the established
the operator in establishing the
              path could result in potentially
expected rod pattern and flux
              high control rod worths
shape at rated power
  (9) Shutdown margin                               OBJ. V.B.15.c
(c)
        (a)   Technical specifications of the
Deviation from the established
              plant require knowing whether the
path could result in potentially
              plant can be shutdown to a safe
high control rod worths
              level
(9) Shutdown margin
        (b) Without the insertion capability of   Obj. V.B.20.g
OBJ. V.B.15.c
              all control rods, shutdown margin
(a)
              will not be as great, thus closer to
Technical specifications of the
              an inadvertent criticality
plant require knowing whether the
  (10) Control Rod Worth variables
plant can be shutdown to a safe
        (a)   Moderator temperature               OBJ. V.8.20.e
level
              i.     As temperature rises,         SER 3-05
(b)
                      slowing down length and
Without the insertion capability of
                      thermal diffusion length
Obj. V.B.20.g
                      increase
all control rods, shutdown margin
              ii.     Rod worth increases with
will not be as great, thus closer to
                      as moderator temperature
an inadvertent criticality
                      increases
(10)
        (b)   Void effects on rod worth
Control Rod Worth variables
              i.     As voids increase, average
(a)
                      neutron flux energy
Moderator temperature
                      increases
OBJ. V.8.20.e
              ii.     U238 and Pu240 will
i.
                      capture more epithermal
As temperature rises,
(                      neutrons through
SER 3-05
                      resonance
slowing down length and
thermal diffusion length
increase
ii.
Rod worth increases with
as moderator temperature
increases
(b)
Void effects on rod worth
i.
As voids increase, average
neutron flux energy
increases
ii.
U238 and Pu240 will
(
capture more epithermal
neutrons through
resonance


      BFN                         CRD System Failure               1-AOI-85-3
(
      Unit 1                                                       Rev. 0003
BFN
(                                                                  Page 7 of 11
CRD System Failure
  4.1 Immediate Actions (continued)
1-AOI-85-3
      [2]     IF operating CRD PUMP has tripped AND backup CRD PUMP
Unit 1
                is NOT available, THEN (Otherwise N/A)
Rev. 0003
                PERFORM the following at Panel 1-9-5:
Page 7 of 11
            [2.1 ]     PLACE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11 ,
4.1
                        in MAN at minimum setting.                             D
Immediate Actions (continued)
            [2.2]       ATTEMPT TO RESTART tripped CRD Pump using one
[2]
                        of the follow ing:
IF operating CRD PUMP has tripped AND backup CRD PUMP
                        *   CRD PUMP 1B, using 1-HS-85-2A
is NOT available, THEN (Otherwise N/A)
                        *   CRD Pump 1A, using 1-HS-85-1A                     D
PERFORM the following at Panel 1-9-5:
            [2.3]       ADJUST CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,
[2.1 ]
                        1-FIC-85-11, to establish the following cond itions:
PLACE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11 ,
                        *   CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 1-PDI-85-18A,
in MAN at minimum setting.
                            approx imately 20 psid.                           D
D
                        *   CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11,
[2.2]
                            between 40 and 65 gpm.                             D
ATTEMPT TO RESTART tripped CRD Pump using one
            [2.4]       BALANCE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,
of the following:
                        1-FIC-85-11 , and PLACE in AUTO or BALANCE.             D
*
      [3]     IF Reactor Pressure is less than 900 psig AND either of the
CRD PUMP 1B, using 1-HS-85-2A
                following conditions exists :
*
                *     In-service CRD Pump tripped and neither CRD Pump can
CRD Pump 1A, using 1-HS-85-1A
                    be started , OR
D
                *   Charging Water Pressure can NOT be restored and
[2.3]
                      maintained above 940 psig, THEN
ADJUST CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,
                PERFORM the follow ing: (Otherwise N/A)
1-FIC-85-11, to establish the following conditions:
            [3.1]       MANUALLY SCRAM Reactor and IMMEDIATELY
*
                        PLACE the Reactor Mode Switch in the SHUTDOWN
CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 1-PDI-85-18A,
                        position.                                               D
approximately 20 psid.
            [3.2]      REFER TO 1-AOI-100-1. [Item 020]                       D
D
*
CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11,
between 40 and 65 gpm.
D
[2.4]
BALANCE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,
1-FIC-85-11 , and PLACE in AUTO or BALANCE.
D
[3]
IF Reactor Pressure is less than 900 psig AND either of the
following conditions exists:
*
In-service CRD Pump tripped and neither CRD Pump can
be started , OR
*
Charging Water Pressure can NOT be restored and
maintained above 940 psig, THEN
PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)
[3.1]
[3.2]
MANUALLY SCRAM Reactor and IMMEDIATELY
PLACE the Reactor Mode Switch in the SHUTDOWN
position.
REFER TO 1-AOI-100-1. [Item 020]
D
D


                                                    OPL 171.006
OPL 171.006
                                                    Revision 9
Revision 9
                                                    Page 30 of 60
Page 30 of 60
(   (6)   The withdraw motion is terminated prior
(
          to reaching the desired position and the
(6)
          rod is settled as discussed earlier.
The withdraw motion is terminated prior
  d. Cooling water is continuously supplied via the
to reaching the desired position and the
    P-under port and insert header.
rod is settled as discussed earlier.
    (1)   Flow from plug type orifice in flange
d.
          follows passage between outer tube and
Cooling water is continuously supplied via the
          thermal sleeve to outer screen.
P-under port and insert header.
    (2)   Cooling water is required to protect the   OBJ. V.B.18
(1)
          graphitar seals from high reactor
Flow from plug type orifice in flange
          temperatures.
follows passage between outer tube and
    (3)   Long exposures at high temperatures will
thermal sleeve to outer screen.
          result in brittle, fast- wearing seals.
(2)
    (4)   Drive temperature should be maintained
Cooling water is required to protect the
          at <350&deg;F and the cause should be
OBJ. V.B.18
          investigated if it exceeds this value.
graphitar seals from high reactor
    (5)   Concern is that the high temperature
temperatures.
          may be caused by a leaking scram
(3)
          discharge valve.
Long exposures at high temperatures will
    (6)   This problem should be corrected as
result in brittle, fast- wearing seals.
          soon as possible to prevent damage to
(4)
          the valve.
Drive temperature should be maintained
  e. Scram function
at <350&deg;F and the cause should be
    (1)   There are two sources of water that can   OBJ . V.B/E.11,
investigated if it exceeds this value.
          be used to scram a drive: reactor water   V.D.10
(5)
          and accumulator water.
Concern is that the high temperature
    (2)   Reactor water scram feature
may be caused by a leaking scram
          (a)     Reactor water, if at high enough
discharge valve.
                  pressure, is capable of scramming More on required
(6)
                  the drive without any accumulator amount of
This problem should be corrected as
                  assistance.                       pressure to lift
soon as possible to prevent damage to
                                                      drive and control
the valve.
          (b)     The over-piston area is opened to rod later in LP.
e.
                  the scram discharge header.
Scram function
(1)
There are two sources of water that can
OBJ. V.B/E.11,
be used to scram a drive: reactor water
V.D.10
and accumulator water.
(2)
Reactor water scram feature
(a)
Reactor water, if at high enough
pressure, is capable of scramming
More on required
the drive without any accumulator
amount of
assistance.
pressure to lift
drive and control
(b)
The over-piston area is opened to
rod later in LP.
the scram discharge header.


                                                              OPL171 .006
(
                                                              Revision 9
(2)
                                                              Page 35 of 60
The primary effect is reduced 10 of the
(          (2)   The primary effect is reduced 10 of the
inner tube just below the bottom of the
                  inner tube just below the bottom of the
collet piston.
                  collet piston.
(a)
                  (a)     In serious overpressure situations,
In serious overpressure situations,
                          this squeezes the inner tube
this squeezes the inner tube
                          against the circumference of the
against the circumference of the
                          index tube.
index tube.
                  (b)     The index tube is then held in the
(b)
                          insert overtravel position and often
The index tube is then held in the
                          cannot be withdrawn.
insert overtravel position and often
          (3)   Bulging of the index tube as described
cannot be withdrawn.
                  above also occurs.
OPL171 .006
    b.   Extensive procedural controls are specified to
Revision 9
          prevent improper valving of the hydraulic
Page 35 of 60
          module.
(3)
    c.   Particular caution should be observed during
Bulging of the index tube as described
          the startup test program.
above also occurs.
  3. Scram Capability
b.
    a.   Piston areas
Extensive procedural controls are specified to
          (1)     Under-piston area equals 4.0 in2.
prevent improper valving of the hydraulic
          (2)     Over-piston area equals 2.8 in2 .
module.
    b.   Normal scram forces
c.
          (1)     During a normal scram condition, the
Particular caution should be observed during
                  over-piston area is opened to the scram
the startup test program.
                  discharge volume which is initially at
3.
                  atmospheric pressure.
Scram Capability
          (2)     Accumulator and/or reactor pressure is
a.
                  simultaneously applied to the under-
Piston areas
                  piston area. The net initial force applied
(1)
                  to the drive (taking no credit for the
Under-piston area equals 4.0 in2.
                  accumulator) can be calculated as
(2)
                  follows.
Over-piston area equals 2.8 in2.
          Fnet =(Forces Up) - (Forces Down)
b.
Normal scram forces
(1)
During a normal scram condition, the
over-piston area is opened to the scram
discharge volume which is initially at
atmospheric pressure.
(2)
Accumulator and/or reactor pressure is
simultaneously applied to the under-
piston area. The net initial force applied
to the drive (taking no credit for the
accumulator) can be calculated as
follows.
Fnet =(Forces Up) - (Forces Down)


                                                      OPL171.006
(
                                                      Revision 9
Fnet = (Rx Pressure x Under-Piston Area) -
                                                      Page 36 of 60
(Rx Pressure x Area of Index Tube
(    Fnet = (Rx Pressure x Under-Piston Area) -
+ Weight of Blade + Friction)
              (Rx Pressure x Area of Index Tube
Fnet =(1000 psig x 4.0 in2) - [1000 psig
                                                        Note: 4 in2
x (4.0 in2 - 1.2 in2)] - 255 Ibs -
            + Weight of Blade + Friction)
- 500 Ibs
                                                        upward force -
Fnet = 4000 - 2800 - 255 - 500
                                                              2
OPL171.006
                                                        1.2 in
Revision 9
    Fnet =(1000 psig x 4.0 in2) - [1000 psig         downward force
Page 36 of 60
                                                        = 2.8 in2
Note: 4 in2
            x (4.0 in2 - 1.2 in2)] - 255 Ibs -
upward force -
              - 500 Ibs
1.2 in2
    Fnet = 4000 - 2800 - 255 - 500
downward force
    Fnet = 445 Ibs         (Upward)
= 2.8 in2
  c. Single failure proof - There is no single-mode
Fnet = 445 Ibs
    failure to the hydraulic system which would
(Upward)
    prevent the drive from scramming .
c.
  d. Accumulator versus reactor vessel pressure
Single failure proof - There is no single-mode
    scrams
failure to the hydraulic system which would
    (1 )   TP-9 represents a plot of 90 percent       TP-9
prevent the drive from scramming .
            scram times versus reactor pressure .
d.
            (a)     Reactor pressure only
Accumulator versus reactor vessel pressure
            (b)     Accumulator pressure only
scrams
            (c)     Combined reactor and
(1 )
                    accumulator pressure
TP-9 represents a plot of 90 percent
    (2)     Scram times are measured for only the
scram times versus reactor pressure.
            first 90% of the rod insertion since the
(a)
            buffer holes at the top end of the stroke
Reactor pressure only
            slow the drive.
(b)
      (3)   Reactor-pressure-only scram
Accumulator pressure only
            (a)     As can be seen from TP-9, the
(c)
                    drive cannot be scrammed with
Combined reactor and
                    reactor pressure ~ 400 psig.
accumulator pressure
            (b)     The net initial upward force
TP-9
                    available to scram the drive can
(2)
                    be calculated as follows.
Scram times are measured for only the
first 90% of the rod insertion since the
buffer holes at the top end of the stroke
slow the drive.
(3)
Reactor-pressure-only scram
(a)
As can be seen from TP-9, the
drive cannot be scrammed with
reactor pressure ~ 400 psig.
(b)
The net initial upward force
available to scram the drive can
be calculated as follows.


                                                      OPL 171.006
OPL171.006
                                                      Revision 9
Revision 9
                                                      Page 38 of 60
Page 38 of 60
(
(
  e. Average scram times (normal drive)               TP-9
e.
    (1)   Technical Specifications state that scram
Average scram times (normal drive)
            times are to be obtained without reliance
TP-9
            on the CRD pumps.
(1)
    (2)   Consequently, the charging water must
Technical Specifications state that scram
            be valved out on the drive to be tested .
times are to be obtained without reliance
    (3)   Maximum scram time for a typical drive
on the CRD pumps.
            occurs at 800 psig reactor pressure.
(2)
    (4)   This is why Technical Specifications
Consequently, the charging water must
            specify that scram times are to be taken
be valved out on the drive to be tested.
            at 800 psig or greater reactor pressure.
(3)
  f. Abnormal scram conditions
Maximum scram time for a typical drive
    (1)   Scram outlet valve failure to open
occurs at 800 psig reactor pressure.
    (2)   Drive will slowly scram on seal leakage
(4)
            as long as accumulator charging water
This is why Technical Specifications
            pressure stays greater than reactor
specify that scram times are to be taken
            pressure.
at 800 psig or greater reactor pressure.
    (3)   If the accumulator is not available, the
f.
            drive will not scram (this is a double
Abnormal scram conditions
            failure) .
(1)
  g. Control Rods failure to Insert After Scram       Obj. V.D .11
Scram outlet valve failure to open
    (1)   This condition could be due to hydraulic
(2)
            lock.
Drive will slowly scram on seal leakage
    (2)     Procedure has operator close the         See 2-01-85 & 2-
as long as accumulator charging water
            Withdraw Riser Isolation valve. Connect   EOI App-1 E for
pressure stays greater than reactor
            drain hose to Withdraw Riser Vent Test     detailed
pressure.
            Connection on the affected HCU. Slowly     operations
(3)
            open Withdraw Riser Vent. When inward
If the accumulator is not available, the
            motion has stopped, close Withdraw         Self Check
drive will not scram (this is a double
            Riser Vent.                               Peer Check
failure).
g.
Control Rods failure to Insert After Scram
Obj. V.D.11
(1)
This condition could be due to hydraulic
lock.
(2)
Procedure has operator close the
See 2-01-85 &2-
Withdraw Riser Isolation valve. Connect
EOI App-1 E for
drain hose to Withdraw Riser Vent Test
detailed
Connection on the affected HCU. Slowly
operations
open Withdraw Riser Vent. When inward
motion has stopped, close Withdraw
Self Check
Riser Vent.
Peer Check


  28. RO 201006K4 .09 OOl/MEM/T2G2/RWM//201006K4.09/3.2/3.2/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS
      The Rod Worth Minimizer must be INITIALIZED to properly determine rod position and sequence .
      Which ONE of the following describes how RWM System INITIALIZATION is accomplished?
(
(
      A.    INITIALIZATION occurs automatically when the RWM is unbypassed.
      B.    INITIALIZATION occurs automatically every 5 seconds while in the transition zone .
      C.oI INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when the
            RWM is unbypassed.
      D.    INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when power
            drops below the LPSP.
      KIA Statement:
      201006 RWM
      K4.09 - Knowledge of ROD WORTH MINIMIZER SYSTEM (RWM) (PLANT SPECIF IC) design feature(s)
      and/or interlocks which provide for the following : System initialization : P-Spec(Not-BWR6)
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific of
      which plant condition would INITIALIZE the RWM.
      References: 1/2/3-01-85, OPL 171.024
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
      0610 NRC Exam
      REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
      Plausibility Analysis:
      In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
      1. When RWM INITIALIZATION is required .
      2. How RWM INITIALIZATION is accomplished.
      A is incorrect. This is plausible because initialization is required when the RWM is unbypassed, but this
      must be done manually.
      B is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM automatically initiates a "scanllatch" to determine the
      correct latched rod group, but this is not the same as INITIALIZATION.
      C is correct.
      D is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM must be manually INITIALIZED, but the RWM does
      not require initialization because the LPSP is reached . THe RWM will automatically perform a
    "scanllatch" at that point.
(
(
28. RO 201006K4.09 OOl/MEM/T2G2/RWM//201006K4.09/3.2/3.2/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS
The Rod Worth Minimizer must be INITIALIZED to properly determine rod position and sequence.
Which ONE of the following describes how RWM System INITIALIZATION is accomplished?
A.
INITIALIZATION occurs automatically when the RWM is unbypassed.
B.
INITIALIZATION occurs automatically every 5 seconds while in the transition zone.
C.oI INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when the
RWM is unbypassed.
D.
INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when power
drops below the LPSP.
KIA Statement:
201006 RWM
K4.09 - Knowledge of ROD WORTH MINIMIZER SYSTEM (RWM) (PLANT SPECIF IC) design feature(s)
and/or interlocks which provide for the following : System initialization : P-Spec(Not-BWR6)
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific of
which plant condition would INITIALIZE the RWM.
References:
1/2/3-01-85, OPL 171.024
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
1. When RWM INITIALIZATION is required .
2. How RWM INITIALIZATION is accomplished.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because initialization is required when the RWM is unbypassed, but this
must be done manually.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM automatically initiates a "scanllatch" to determine the
correct latched rod group, but this is not the same as INITIALIZATION.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM must be manually INITIALIZED, but the RWM does
not require initialization because the LPSP is reached. THe RWM will automatically perform a
"scanllatch" at that point.


                                                          OPL171.024
OPL171.024
                                                          Revision 13
Revision 13
                                                          Page 19 of 53
Page 19 of 53
(                                                   INSTRUCTOR NOTES
(
    (2)   The MANUAL indicator light will then be Obj. V.B.6
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
            lit and all error and alarm indications
(2)
            that were on prior to bypass will be
The MANUAL indicator light will then be Obj. V.B.6
            blanked out on the RWM system
lit and all error and alarm indications
            displays.
that were on prior to bypass will be
    (3)   A manual bypass will also light the
blanked out on the RWM system
            RWM and PROGR indicator on the
displays.
            RWM-COMP-PROGR-BUFF
(3)
            pushbutton.
A manual bypass will also light the
  f. SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton
RWM and PROGR indicator on the
    switch/indicator
RWM-COMP-PROGR-BUFF
    (1)   The SYSTEM INITIALIZE switch is
pushbutton.
            depressed to initialize the RWM
f.
            system.
SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton
    (2)   Initialization must be performed
switch/indicator
            whenever the RWM has been taken off
(1)
            line, as occurs whenever the RWM
The SYSTEM INITIALIZE switch is
            program is aborted or manually
depressed to initialize the RWM
            bypassed.
system.
    (3)   Therefore, following any program abort
(2)
            or bypass, the SYSTEM INITIALIZE
Initialization must be performed
            switch must be depressed before the
whenever the RWM has been taken off
            program can be run again.
line, as occurs whenever the RWM
    (4)   The SYSTEM INITIALIZE window
program is aborted or manually
            lights white while the switch is held
bypassed.
            down.
(3)
  g. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC switch/indicator
Therefore, following any program abort
    (1)   This switch can be pressed at any time
or bypass, the SYSTEM INITIALIZE
            after the system has been initialized to
switch must be depressed before the
            request that the system diagnostic
program can be run again.
            routine be performed.
(4)
    (2)   The RWM program will thereupon be
The SYSTEM INITIALIZE window
            initiated and will perform the routine,
lights white while the switch is held
            which consists of applying and then
down.
            removing in sequence the insert and
g.
            withdraw blocks (nominal 10 second
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC switch/indicator
            frequency).
(1)
    (3)   The operator can verify the operability NOTE: Rod insert
This switch can be pressed at any time
            of the rod block circuits by observing   and withdrawal
after the system has been initialized to
(           that the INSERT BLOCK and
request that the system diagnostic
            WITHDRAW BLOCK alarm lights come
routine be performed.
                                                    permit lights will go
(2)
                                                    off when block is
The RWM program will thereupon be
            on and then go off as the blocks are     applied.
initiated and will perform the routine,
which consists of applying and then
removing in sequence the insert and
withdraw blocks (nominal 10 second
frequency).
(3)
The operator can verify the operability
NOTE: Rod insert
of the rod block circuits by observing
and withdrawal
(
that the INSERT BLOCK and
permit lights will go
WITHDRAW BLOCK alarm lights come
off when block is
on and then go off as the blocks are
applied.


        BFN                  Control Rod Drive System            1-01-85
      Unit 1                                                      Rev. 0005
(                                                                  Paue 136 of 179
  8.18  Reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer
        [1 ]  VERIFY the following initial conditions are satisfied:
                *    The Rod Worth Minimizer is available to be placed in
                      operation                                                    D
                *    Integrated Computer System (ICS) is available                D
                *    The Shift Manager/Reactor Engineer has directed
                      reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer                  D
        [2]    REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.3.            D
        [3]    VERIFY RWM SWITCH PANEL, 1-XS-85-9025 in NORMAL.                  D
        [4]    CHECK the Manual/Auto Bypass lights are extinguished.              D
        [5]    DEPRESS AND HOLD INOP/RESET pushbutton.                            D
        [6]    CHECK all four lights (RWM/COMP/PROG/BUFF) are
                illuminated.                                                      D
        [7]    RELEASE INOP/RESET pushbutton and CHECK all four
                lights extinguished.                                              D
        [8]  SIMUL TANEOUSLY DEPRESS OUT OF
                SEQUENCE/SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton and
                INOP/RESET pushbutton to place the Rod Worth Minimizer in
                service.                                                          D
        [9]    IF Rod Worth Minim izer will NOT initialize, THEN
                DETERMINE alarms on RWM Display Screen and CORRECT
              problems.                                                          D
        [10]  IF unable to correct problems and initialize RWM, THEN
              NOTIFY Reactor Engineer.                                            D
(
(
(
BFN
Control Rod Drive System
1-01-85
Unit 1
Rev. 0005
Paue 136 of 179
8.18
Reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer
[1 ]
VERIFY the following initial conditions are satisfied:
*
The Rod Worth Minimizer is available to be placed in
operation
D
*
Integrated Computer System (ICS) is available
D
*
The Shift Manager/Reactor Engineer has directed
reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer
D
[2]
REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.3.
D
[3]
VERIFY RWM SWITCH PANEL, 1-XS-85-9025 in NORMAL.
D
[4]
CHECK the Manual/Auto Bypass lights are extinguished.
D
[5]
DEPRESS AND HOLD INOP/RESET pushbutton.
D
[6]
CHECK all four lights (RWM/COMP/PROG/BUFF) are
illuminated.
D
[7]
RELEASE INOP/RESET pushbutton and CHECK all four
lights extinguished.
D
[8]
SIMULTANEOUSLY DEPRESS OUT OF
SEQUENCE/SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton and
INOP/RESET pushbutton to place the Rod Worth Minimizer in
service.
D
[9]
IF Rod Worth Minimizer will NOT initialize, THEN
DETERMINE alarms on RWM Display Screen and CORRECT
problems.
D
[10]
IF unable to correct problems and initialize RWM, THEN
NOTIFY Reactor Engineer.
D


      BFN                 Control Rod Drive System               1-01-85
(
      Unit 1                                                       Rev. 0005
BFN
(                                                                  Page 19 of 179
Control Rod Drive System
  3.3   Rod Worth Minimizer (RWM) (continued)
1-01-85
        N.   For group limits only, RWM recognizes the Nominal Limits only. The Nominal
Unit 1
            Limit is the insert or withdraw limit for the group assigned by RWM. The
Rev. 0005
            Alternate Limit is no longer recognized by the RWM as an Acceptable
Page 19 of 179
            Group Limit.
3.3
        O.   During RWM latching, the latched group will be the highest numbered
Rod Worth Minimizer (RWM) (continued)
            group with 2 or less insert errors and having at least 1 rod withdrawn past its
N.
            insert limits.
For group limits only, RWM recognizes the Nominal Limits only. The Nominal
            1.   With Sequence Control ON, latching occurs as follows: (Normally, startups
Limit is the insert or withdraw limit for the group assigned by RWM. The
                  will be performed with Sequence Control ON)
Alternate Limit is no longer recognized by the RWM as an Acceptable
                  a.   RWM will latch down when all rods in the presently latched
Group Limit.
                        group have been inserted to the group insert limit and a rod in the next
O.
                        lower group is selected.
During RWM latching, the latched group will be the highest numbered
                  b.   RWM will latch up when a rod within the next higher group is selected,
group with 2 or less insert errors and having at least 1 rod withdrawn past its
                        provided that no more than two insert errors result.
insert limits.
            2.   With Sequence Control OFF, latching occurs as follows:
1.
                  a.   For non-repeating groups, latching occurs as described above, OR
With Sequence Control ON, latching occurs as follows: (Normally, startups
                  b.   For repeating groups, latching occurs to the next setup or set down
will be performed with Sequence Control ON)
                        based on rod movement as opposed to rod selection.
a.
        P.   Latching occurs at the following times:
RWM will latch down when all rods in the presently latched
            1.   System initialization.
group have been inserted to the group insert limit and a rod in the next
            2.   Following a "System Diagnostic" request.
lower group is selected.
            3.   When operator demands entry or termination of "Rod Test."
b.
            4.   When power drops below LPAP.
RWM will latch up when a rod within the next higher group is selected,
            5.   When power drops below LPSP.
provided that no more than two insert errors result.
            6.   Every five seconds in the transition zone.
2.
            7.   Following any full control rod scan when power is below LPAP.
With Sequence Control OFF, latching occurs as follows:
            8.   Upon demand by the Operator (Scan/Latch Request function).
a.
            9.   Following correction of insert or withdraw errors.
For non-repeating groups, latching occurs as described above, OR
b.
For repeating groups, latching occurs to the next setup or set down
based on rod movement as opposed to rod selection.
P.
Latching occurs at the following times:
1.
System initialization.
2.
Following a "System Diagnostic" request.
3.
When operator demands entry or termination of "Rod Test."
4.
When power drops below LPAP.
5.
When power drops below LPSP.
6.
Every five seconds in the transition zone.
7.
Following any full control rod scan when power is below LPAP.
8.
Upon demand by the Operator (Scan/Latch Request function).
9.
Following correction of insert or withdraw errors.


  29. RO 20200 1K6.09 OOl/C/A/T2G2/68 - RECIRC/24/202001 K6.09//RO/SROI
(
      Given the following plant conditions:
29. RO 202001K6.09 OOl/C/A/T2G2/68 - RECIRC/24/202001 K6.09//RO/SROI
            *   Unit 3 is operating at 55% power with Reactor Feed Pump (RFP) "A" & "C" running and RFP "B"
Given the following plant conditions:
(                idling.
*
            *   Both Recirculation Pump speeds are 53%.
Unit 3 is operating at 55% power with Reactor Feed Pump (RFP) "A" & "C" running and RFP "B"
          *     The "A" RFP trips, resulting in the following conditions:
idling.
                          Reactor Water level Abnormal alarm sealed in
*
                          Reactor Vessel Wtr Level Low Half Scram alarm sealed in
Both Recirculation Pump speeds are 53%.
          *   Indicated Reactor Water Level drops to _10" before RFP "B" is brought on line to reverse the level
*
                trend and level is stabilized at 33".
The "A" RFP trips, resulting in the following conditions:
      Which ONE of the following describes the steady state condition of both Recirculation Pumps?
Reactor Water level Abnormal alarm sealed in
      A.     Running at 53% speed
Reactor Vessel Wtr Level Low Half Scram alarm sealed in
      B.     Running at 45% speed
*
      c. Y'   Running at 28% speed
Indicated Reactor Water Level drops to _10" before RFP "B" is brought on line to reverse the level
      D.     Tripped on ATWS/RPT signal.
trend and level is stabilized at 33".
      KIA Statement:
Which ONE of the following describes the steady state condition of both Recirculation Pumps?
      202001 Recirculation
A.
      K6.09 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the follow ing will have on the
Running at 53% speed
      RECIRCULATION SYSTEM: Reactor water level
B.
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
Running at 45% speed
      plant conditions and times to determine the effect of a change in reactor water level on the Recirculation
c.Y' Running at 28% speed
      System .
D.
      References: 3-01-68 , OPL 171.007, OPL 171.012
Tripped on ATWS/RPT signal.
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
KIA Statement:
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires menta lly using this
202001 Recirculation
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome .
K6.09 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the
      0610 NRC Exam
RECIRCULATION SYSTEM: Reactor water level
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions and times to determine the effect of a change in reactor water level on the Recirculation
System.
References: 3-01-68, OPL 171.007, OPL171.012
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
(
  Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  1. Did plant conditions exceed the Recirc Runback setpoint.
  2. Which Runback is appropriate for the given conditions.
  A is incorrect. Total Feedflow would drop below 19% with only one RFP running at 55% rated power,
  thus initiating a Recirc Runback to 28%. This is plausible based on the initial power level being close
  enough to create doubt on total feedflow resulting from the trip of one RFP.
  B is incorrect. This is plausible because a Recirc Runback DID occur, but the 45% speed given in the
  distractor is the typical speed the Recirc Pumps run at during startup , not following a RFP trip.
  C is correct.
  D is incorrect. This is plausible because ATWS/RPT signals are associated with low RPV level, however
  the setpoint is -45 inches and level only lowered to -10 inches.
l
l
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Did plant conditions exceed the Recirc Runback setpoint.
2. Which Runback is appropriate for the given conditions.
A is incorrect. Total Feedflow would drop below 19% with only one RFP running at 55% rated power,
thus initiating a Recirc Runback to 28%. This is plausible based on the initial power level being close
enough to create doubt on total feedflow resulting from the trip of one RFP.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because a Recirc Runback DID occur, but the 45% speed given in the
distractor is the typical speed the Recirc Pumps run at during startup , not following a RFP trip.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because ATWS/RPT signals are associated with low RPV level, however
the setpoint is -45 inches and level only lowered to -10 inches.


      BFN               Reactor Recirculation System               3-01-68
(
      Unit 3                                                       Rev. 0066
BFN
(                                                                  Page 13 of 179
Reactor Recirculation System
  3.0   PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
3-01-68
            10. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the temperature of the
Unit 3
                  coolant between the operating and idle Recirc loops are within 50&deg;F of
Rev. 0066
                  each other. This 50&deg;F delta T limit is based on stress analysis for reactor
Page 13 of 179
                  nozzles, stress analysis for reactor recirculation components and piping,
3.0
                  and fuel thermal limits. [GE Sll517 Supplement 1]
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
            11. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the reactor is verified
10. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the temperature of the
                outside of regions 1, 2 and 3 of the Unit 3 Power to Flow Map (ICS or
coolant between the operating and idle Recirc loops are within 50&deg;F of
                Station Reactor Engineering, 0-TI-248).
each other. This 50&deg;F delta T limit is based on stress analysis for reactor
            12. The temperature of the coolant between the dome and the idle Recirc loop
nozzles, stress analysis for reactor recirculation components and piping,
                should be maintained within 75&deg;F of each other. If this limit cannot be
and fuel thermal limits.
                maintained a plant cooldown should be initiated . Failure to maintain this
[GE Sll517 Supplement 1]
                limit and NOT cooldown could result in hangers and/or shock suppressers
11. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the reactor is verified
                exceeding their maximum travel range. [GE SIl251, 430 and 517]
outside of regions 1, 2 and 3 of the Unit 3 Power to Flow Map (ICS or
      M.   Recirc Pump controller limits are as follows:
Station Reactor Engineering, 0-TI-248).
            1. When any individual RFP flow is less than 19% and reactor water level is
12. The temperature of the coolant between the dome and the idle Recirc loop
                below 27 inches, speed limit is set to 75%(-1130 RPM speed) and if speed
should be maintained within 75&deg;F of each other. If this limit cannot be
                is greater than 75%(-1130 RPM speed), Recirc speed will run back to
maintained a plant cooldown should be initiated. Failure to maintain this
                75%(-1130 RPM speed).
limit and NOT cooldown could result in hangers and/or shock suppressers
            2. When total feed water flow is less than 19% (15 sec TD) or Recirc Pump
exceeding their maximum travel range.
                discharge valve is less than 90% open, speed limit is set to 28%
[GE SIl251, 430 and 517]
                (-480 RPM speed) and if speed is greater than 28%(-480 RPM speed),
M.
                Recirc speed will run back to 28%(-480 RPM speed).
Recirc Pump controller limits are as follows:
1.
When any individual RFP flow is less than 19% and reactor water level is
below 27 inches, speed limit is set to 75%(-1130 RPM speed) and if speed
is greater than 75%(-1130 RPM speed), Recirc speed will run back to
75%(-1130 RPM speed).
2.
When total feed water flow is less than 19% (15 sec TD) or Recirc Pump
discharge valve is less than 90% open, speed limit is set to 28%
(-480 RPM speed) and if speed is greater than 28%(-480 RPM speed),
Recirc speed will run back to 28%(-480 RPM speed).


      BFN                  Reactor Recirculation System            3-01-68
      Unit 3                                                      Rev. 0066
(                                                                  Page 15 of 179
  3.0  PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
        R. The power supplies to the MMR and DFR relays are listed below.
                        VFD3A
              I&C BUS A (BKR 215)            3-RLY-068-MMR3/A & DFR3/A
              ICS PNL 532 (BKR 30)          3-RLY-068-MMR2/A & DFR2/A
              UNIT PFD (BKR 615)            3-RLY-068-MMR1/A & DFR1/A
                        VFD3B
              I&C BUS B (BKR 315)            3-RLY-068-MMR3/B & DFR3/B
              ICS PNL 532 (BKR 26)          3-RLY-068-MMR2/B & DFR2/B
              UNIT PFD (BKR 616)            3-RLY-068-MMR1/B & DFR1/B
        S.    A complete list of Recirc System trip functions is provided in Illustration 4. The
              RPT breakers between the recirc drives and pump motors will open on any of
              the following:
              1.    Reactor dome Pressure ~ 1148 psig (ATWS/RPT). (Both pressure
                  switches in Logic A or both pressure switches in Logic B will cause RPT
                  breakers to trip both pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)
              2.  Reactor Water Level s -45" (ATWS/RPT) . (Both level switches in Logic A
                  or both level switches in Level B will cause RPT breakers to trip both
                  pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)
              3.  Turbine trip or load reject condition, when  ~ 30% power by turbine first
                  stage pressure (EOC/RPT) .
        1.    The ATWS/RPT A(B) logic to trip the RPT breakers is defeated if the
              ATWS/RPT/ARI A(B) manual logic is armed using the arming collar on
              Panel 3-9-5. B(A) logic would still be functional and trip the RPT breakers if the
              setpoints are reached. If both manual push-buttons on 3-9-5 are armed,
              ATWS/RPT automatic logic is totally defeated (no RPT breaker trip will occur if
              the ATWS/RPT trip setpoints are reached) . EOC/RPT logic and ATWS/ARI
              logic will function without regard to the position of the arming collars.
              ATWS/R PT/AR I logic can be reset 30 seconds after setpoints are reset.
(
(
BFN
Reactor Recirculation System
3-01-68
Unit 3
Rev. 0066
Page 15 of 179
3.0
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
R.
The power supplies to the MMR and DFR relays are listed below.
VFD3A
I&C BUS A (BKR 215)
ICS PNL 532 (BKR 30)
UNIT PFD (BKR 615)
VFD3B
I&C BUS B (BKR 315)
ICS PNL 532 (BKR 26)
UNIT PFD (BKR 616)
3-RLY-068-MMR3/A & DFR3/A
3-RLY-068-MMR2/A & DFR2/A
3-RLY-068-MMR1/A & DFR1/A
3-RLY-068-MMR3/B & DFR3/B
3-RLY-068-MMR2/B & DFR2/B
3-RLY-068-MMR1/B & DFR1/B
(
S.
A complete list of Recirc System trip functions is provided in Illustration 4. The
RPT breakers between the recirc drives and pump motors will open on any of
the following:
1.
Reactor dome Pressure ~ 1148 psig (ATWS/RPT). (Both pressure
switches in Logic A or both pressure switches in Logic B will cause RPT
breakers to trip both pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)
2.
Reactor Water Level s -45" (ATWS/RPT) . (Both level switches in Logic A
or both level switches in Level B will cause RPT breakers to trip both
pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)
3.
Turbine trip or load reject condition, when ~ 30% power by turbine first
stage pressure (EOC/RPT) .
1.
The ATWS/RPT A(B) logic to trip the RPT breakers is defeated if the
ATWS/RPT/ARI A(B) manual logic is armed using the arming collar on
Panel 3-9-5. B(A) logic would still be functional and trip the RPT breakers if the
setpoints are reached. If both manual push-buttons on 3-9-5 are armed,
ATWS/RPT automatic logic is totally defeated (no RPT breaker trip will occur if
the ATWS/RPT trip setpoints are reached). EOC/RPT logic and ATWS/ARI
logic will function without regard to the position of the arming collars.
ATWS/R PT/ARI logic can be reset 30 seconds after setpoints are reset.


  30. RO 215001Al.Ol      OOlIMEMlTIG2/TIPI121500IAl.Ol//RO/SROI
      Which ONE of the following describes the procedural requirements in accordance with 2-01-94 ,
      Traversing In-Core Probe System while running TIP traces?
(
(
      A.    The TIP detector shall be withdrawn to the In-Shield position and the ball valve closed following
            each TIP trace .
      8.    Running a TIP trace while personnel are working inside the Drywell is prohibited .
      C."  The Radiation Protection Shift Supervisor is required to be notified prior to TIP System operation.
      D.    The TIP Machine will automatically withdraw to the in-shield position, then the ball valve will
            automatically close following a PCIS Group 6 isolation .
      KIA Statement:
      215001 Traversing In-core Probe
      A1.01 - Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the
      TRAVERSING IN-CORE PROBE controls including: Radiation levels: (Not-BWR1)
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to determine the
      operating limitations of the TIP system with respect to high radiation .
      References: 2-01-94 Precautions & Limitations
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
      0610 NRC Exam
      REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
      Plausibility Analysis:
      In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
      1.  Limitations for running TIP traces with personnel in the Drywell.
      2.  Notification requirements prior to running TIPs .
      3.  Which PCIS Group will cause a TIP retraction and isolation .
      4.  Requirements for running multiple simultaneous TIP traces.
      A is incorrect. This is plausible because that limitation is placed on TIP operation, but only when TIP
      operation is no longer required. The TIP detector can be stored in the Indexer in-between traces using
      the same TIP Machine for ALARA concerns.
      8 is incorrect. This is plausible because specific permission and controls are required to allow this
      condition, but it is allowable.
      C is correct.
      D is incorrect. This is plausible because the TIP response to a PCIS isolation is correct, but it is not a
    Group 6 isolation.
(
(
30. RO 215001Al.Ol OOlIMEMlTIG2/TIPI121500IAl.Ol//RO/SROI
Which ONE of the following describes the procedural requirements in accordance with 2-01-94,
Traversing In-Core Probe System while running TIP traces?
A.
The TIP detector shall be withdrawn to the In-Shield position and the ball valve closed following
each TIP trace.
8.
Running a TIP trace while personnel are working inside the Drywell is prohibited.
C." The Radiation Protection Shift Supervisor is required to be notified prior to TIP System operation.
D.
The TIP Machine will automatically withdraw to the in-shield position, then the ball valve will
automatically close following a PCIS Group 6 isolation.
KIA Statement:
215001 Traversing In-core Probe
A1.01 - Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the
TRAVERSING IN-CORE PROBE controls including: Radiation levels: (Not-BWR1)
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to determine the
operating limitations of the TIP system with respect to high radiation .
References:
2-01-94 Precautions & Limitations
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
1. Limitations for running TIP traces with personnel in the Drywell.
2. Notification requirements prior to running TIPs.
3. Which PCIS Group will cause a TIP retraction and isolation.
4. Requirements for running multiple simultaneous TIP traces.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because that limitation is placed on TIP operation, but only when TIP
operation is no longer required. The TIP detector can be stored in the Indexer in-between traces using
the same TIP Machine for ALARA concerns.
8 is incorrect. This is plausible because specific permission and controls are required to allow this
condition, but it is allowable.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because the TIP response to a PCIS isolation is correct, but it is not a
Group 6 isolation.


      BFN               Traversing Incore Probe System           2-01-94
(
      Unit2                                                       Rev. 0029
BFN
(                                                                  Page 7 of 26
Traversing Incore Probe System
  3.0   PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
2-01-94
        A. [NER/C] Verification of a digit in CORE LIMIT and DETECTOR POSITION
Unit2
            windows prior to or during TIP insertion ensures TIPs retain the ability to
Rev. 0029
            determine its proper position. This will prevent malfunctions which could
Page 7 of 26
            damage the TI P detector. [GE SIL-166]
3.0
        B. To prevent accidental exposure to personnel , immediately evacuate the area if
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
            the TIP drive area radiation monitor alarms .
A.
        C. [NER/C] Always observe READY light illuminated prior to inserting detector.   [GE
[NER/C] Verification of a digit in CORE LIMIT and DETECTOR POSITION
            SIL-166]
windows prior to or during TIP insertion ensures TIPs retain the ability to
        D. (NERlC] DO NOT move CHANNEL SELECT switch with detector inserted past
determine its proper position. This will prevent malfunctions which could
            Indexer position (0001). The common channel interlock can be defeated in this
damage the TIP detector.
            manner resulting in detector and equipment damage. [GE SIL-092]
[GE SIL-166]
        E. (NERlC] Should detector fail to shift to slow speed when it enters the core, the
B.
            LOW switch should be turned on, switched to manual mode, and the detector
To prevent accidental exposure to personnel , immediately evacuate the area if
            withdrawn. [GE SIL-166]
the TIP drive area radiation monitor alarms.
        F. [NER/C] Length of time detector is left in core should be minimized to limit
C.
            activation of detector and cable . [GE SIL-166]
[NER/C] Always observe READY light illuminated prior to inserting detector.
        G. (NERlC] When TIP System operation is not desired, detectors should be retracted
[GE
            and stored in chamber shield with ball valves closed . [GE SIL-166] Storage of
SIL-166]
            detector in Indexer (0001) is allowed only for ALARA concerns and to prevent
D.
            unnecessary masking of multiple inputs to annunciator RX BLDG AREA
(NERlC] DO NOT move CHANNEL SELECT switch with detector inserted past
            RADIATION HIGH 2-RA-90-1 D (2-XA-55-3A, Window 22).
Indexer position (0001). The common channel interlock can be defeated in this
      . H. [NER/C] Upon receipt of a PCIS signal (low reactor water level or high drywell
manner resulting in detector and equipment damage.
            pressure), any detector inserted beyond its shield chamber should be verified to
[GE SIL-092]
            automatically shift to reverse mode and begin withdrawal. Once in shield, ball
E.
            and purge valves close. [GE SIL-166] Ball valve cannot be reopened until PCIS is
(NERlC] Should detector fail to shift to slow speed when it enters the core, the
            reset on Panel 2-9-4 and manual reset of TIP ISOLATION RESET pushbutton
LOW switch should be turned on, switched to manual mode, and the detector
            2-HS-94-7D/S2 located on Panel 2-9-13.
withdrawn.
        I. A detector should not be abruptly stopped from fast speed to off without first
[GE SIL-166]
            switching to slow speed.
F.
        J. [NER/C] Drive Control Units (DCU) should be monitored during withdrawal to
[NER/C] Length of time detector is left in core should be minimized to limit
            prevent any chamber shield withdrawal limit from being overrun. Detectors
activation of detector and cable.
            should be stopped manually at shield limit if auto stop limit switch should fail
[GE SIL-166]
            and verify ball valve closes. [GE SIL-166]
G.
        K. Only one TIP at a time should be operated when maintenance is being
(NERlC] When TIP System operation is not desired, detectors should be retracted
            performed in TI P drive area.
and stored in chamber shield with ball valves closed .
[GE SIL-166] Storage of
detector in Indexer (0001) is allowed only for ALARA concerns and to prevent
unnecessary masking of multiple inputs to annunciator RX BLDG AREA
RADIATION HIGH 2-RA-90-1 D (2-XA-55-3A, Window 22).
. H.
[NER/C] Upon receipt of a PCIS signal (low reactor water level or high drywell
pressure), any detector inserted beyond its shield chamber should be verified to
automatically shift to reverse mode and begin withdrawal. Once in shield, ball
and purge valves close.
[GE SIL-166] Ball valve cannot be reopened until PCIS is
reset on Panel 2-9-4 and manual reset of TIP ISOLATION RESET pushbutton
2-HS-94-7D/S2 located on Panel 2-9-13.
I.
A detector should not be abruptly stopped from fast speed to off without first
switching to slow speed.
J.
[NER/C] Drive Control Units (DCU) should be monitored during withdrawal to
prevent any chamber shield withdrawal limit from being overrun. Detectors
should be stopped manually at shield limit if auto stop limit switch should fail
and verify ball valve closes.
[GE SIL-166]
K.
Only one TIP at a time should be operated when maintenance is being
performed in TIP drive area.


      BFN                Traversing Incore Probe System        2-01-94
(
      Unit2                                                      Rev. 0029
(                                                               Page 8 of 26
  3.0  PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
      L.  [NRC/CJ DO NOT operate TIPswith personnel inside TIP Room or in vicinity of
            TIP tubing and Indexers in Drywell. Requirement may be waived with approval
            of Shift Manager and site RADCON manager or designee. In this instance,
            RADCON is required to establish such controls as are necessary to prevent
            access to TIP tubing and Indexer areas to preclude unnecessary exposure to
            personnel working in Drywell. RADCON Field Operations Shift Supervisor is
            required to be notified prior to operation of TIP System. [NRC InformationNotice 88-063,
            Supplement 2J
      M.  No channel should be indexed to common channel 10 unless all other channels
            are not indexed to channel 10 and all their READY lights are illuminated .
      N.  [NERlC] DO NOT turn MODE switch to OFF on Drive Control Unit if detector is
            outside shield chamber unless personnel safety requires it. [GE SIL-166J This
            removes power preventing automatic withdrawal on PCIS signal and causing
            ball valves to close on cable or detector. Tip Ball Valves CANNOT fully close
            and shear valves may have to be actuated.
      O.  CHANNEL SELECT switches on Drive Control Units should always be rotated
            in clockwise direction when selecting channels.
      P.  Connector on shear valve indicator circuit should not be removed while testing
            shear valve explosive charges or performing shear valve maintenance with
            detector inserted. This will cause an automatic detector withdrawal.
      Q.  Continuous voice communication should be maintained between TIP operator
            or maintenance personnel in control room and drive mechanism area while
            maintenance is being performed and TIP detector driving is necessary.
      R.  Each applicable ball valve should be opened prior to operating that TIP
            machine.
      S.  TIP Drive Mechanisms and Indexers should have continuous purge supply
            unless required to be removed from service for maintenance.
      T.  During outages when containment is deinerted for personnel access, TIP
            Indexer purge supply should be transferred from nitrogen to Control Air for
            personnel safety.
      U.  Detector damage is possible if TIP ball valve is left open , or is opened during
            DRYWELL PRESSURE TEST. (GE SIL-166)
l
l
BFN
Traversing Incore Probe System
2-01-94
Unit2
Rev. 0029
Page 8 of 26
3.0
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
L.
[NRC/CJ DO NOT operate TIPswith personnel inside TIP Room or in vicinity of
TIP tubing and Indexers in Drywell. Requirement may be waived with approval
of Shift Manager and site RADCON manager or designee. In this instance,
RADCON is required to establish such controls as are necessary to prevent
access to TIP tubing and Indexer areas to preclude unnecessary exposure to
personnel working in Drywell. RADCON Field Operations Shift Supervisor is
required to be notified prior to operation of TIP System.
[NRC InformationNotice88-063,
Supplement2J
M.
No channel should be indexed to common channel 10 unless all other channels
are not indexed to channel 10 and all their READY lights are illuminated.
N.
[NERlC] DO NOT turn MODE switch to OFF on Drive Control Unit if detector is
outside shield chamber unless personnel safety requires it. [GE SIL-166J This
removes power preventing automatic withdrawal on PCIS signal and causing
ball valves to close on cable or detector. Tip Ball Valves CANNOT fully close
and shear valves may have to be actuated.
O.
CHANNEL SELECT switches on Drive Control Units should always be rotated
in clockwise direction when selecting channels.
P.
Connector on shear valve indicator circuit should not be removed while testing
shear valve explosive charges or performing shear valve maintenance with
detector inserted. This will cause an automatic detector withdrawal.
Q .
Continuous voice communication should be maintained between TIP operator
or maintenance personnel in control room and drive mechanism area while
maintenance is being performed and TIP detector driving is necessary.
R.
Each applicable ball valve should be opened prior to operating that TIP
machine.
S.
TIP Drive Mechanisms and Indexers should have continuous purge supply
unless required to be removed from service for maintenance.
T.
During outages when containment is deinerted for personnel access, TIP
Indexer purge supply should be transferred from nitrogen to Control Air for
personnel safety.
U.
Detector damage is possible if TIP ball valve is left open, or is opened during
DRYWELL PRESSURE TEST. (GE SIL-166)


  31. RO 216000K l.l O00l/MEM/T2G2/PR.INSTRJ9/216000Kl.lO//RO/SRO/
      Wh ich ONE of the following indicates how raising recirculation flow affects the Emergency System Range
      indicators (3-58A -58B) and Narrow Range Indicators (e.g., L1-3-53) on Panel 9-5?
(
(
      A.    No effect on Emergency System Range; Narrow Range will indicate higher.
      B.    Emergency System Range will indicate higher; Narrow Range will not be affected.
      C.    Both Emergency System Range and Narrow Range will indicate lower.
      D.oI  Emergency System Range will indicate lower and Narrow Range will not be affected.
      KIA Statement:
      216000 Nuclear Boiler Inst
      K1.10 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between NUCLEAR
      BOILER INSTRUMENTATION and the following : Recirculation flow control system
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
      knowledge of the effect of changes in Recirculation flow on reactor water level instrumentation.
      References: OPL 171.003
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
      0610 NRC Exam
      REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
      Plausibility Analysis:
      In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the effect of raising Recirc flow on
      Normal Range and Emergency Systems Range level instrumentation.
      A is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments may read slightly higher at colder
      conditions, but this does NOT apply to Recirc flow changes.
      B is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments are not effected by Recirc Flow
      changes , but Emergency System Range isntruments will read lower.
      C is incorrect. This is plaus ible because Emergency System Range instruments will read lower, but the
      Narrow Range instruments will not.
      D is correct.
(
(
31. RO 216000Kl.l O00l/MEM/T2G2/PR.INSTRJ9/216000Kl.lO//RO/SRO/
Which ONE of the following indicates how raising recirculation flow affects the Emergency System Range
indicators (3-58A -58B) and Narrow Range Indicators (e.g., L1-3-53) on Panel 9-5?
A.
No effect on Emergency System Range; Narrow Range will indicate higher.
B.
Emergency System Range will indicate higher; Narrow Range will not be affected.
C.
Both Emergency System Range and Narrow Range will indicate lower.
D.oI Emergency System Range will indicate lower and Narrow Range will not be affected.
KIA Statement:
216000 Nuclear Boiler Inst
K1.10 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between NUCLEAR
BOILER INSTRUMENTATION and the following : Recirculation flow control system
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of the effect of changes in Recirculation flow on reactor water level instrumentation.
References:
OPL171.003
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the effect of raising Recirc flow on
Normal Range and Emergency Systems Range level instrumentation.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments may read slightly higher at colder
conditions, but this does NOT apply to Recirc flow changes.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments are not effected by Recirc Flow
changes, but Emergency System Range isntruments will read lower.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because Emergency System Range instruments will read lower, but the
Narrow Range instruments will not.
D is correct.


                                                            OPL 171.003
                                                            Revision 17
                                                            Page 20 of 54
(                                                          INSTRUCTOR NOTES
  d. Four ranges of level indication
    (1)    Normal Control Range (Narrow Range)            Obj. V.B.5
            (a)    oto +60 inch range covering the        Obj. V.B.6
                    normal operating range (analog) with    TP-3 shows only
                    +60" up to +70" digital and 0" down to  analog scale
                    - 10" digital readings.
            (b)    Referenced to instrument zero
            (c)    Four of these instruments are
                    used by Feedwater Level Control
                    System (FWLCS). The level
                    signal utilized by the FWLCS is
                    not directed through the Analog
                    Trip System.
                        i.    Temperature                    Obj. V.B.11.
                              compensated by a              Obj. V.B.13.
                              pressure signal
                      ii.    Most accurate level
                              indication available to the
                              operator
                    iii.    Calibrated for normal
                              operating pressure and
                              temperature
            (d)    These indicators and a recorder
                    point (average of the four) are
                    located on Panel 9-5 .
                    NOTE: An air bubble or leak in          LER 85-006-02
                    the reference leg can cause            (See LP Folder)
                    inaccurate readings in a non-          (Section X.C.1.j.
                    conservative direction resulting in    provides more
                    a mismatch between level                detail)
                    indicators.
                    This problem is particularly
                    prevalent after extended outages
                    when starting up from cold
                    shutdown conditions and at low
                    reactor pressures.
(
(
d.
Four ranges of level indication
OPL 171.003
Revision 17
Page 20 of 54
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
Normal Control Range (Narrow Range)
(1)
(a)
oto +60 inch range covering the
normal operating range (analog) with
+60" up to +70" digital and 0" down to
- 10" digital readings.
Obj. V.B.5
Obj. V.B.6
TP-3 shows only
analog scale
(b)
Referenced to instrument zero
(c)
Four of these instruments are
used by Feedwater Level Control
System (FWLCS). The level
signal utilized by the FWLCS is
not directed through the Analog
Trip System.
i.
Temperature
compensated by a
pressure signal
Obj. V.B.11.
Obj. V.B.13.
(
ii.
Most accurate level
indication available to the
operator
iii.
Calibrated for normal
operating pressure and
temperature
(d)
These indicators and a recorder
point (average of the four) are
located on Panel 9-5.
NOTE: An air bubble or leak in
the reference leg can cause
inaccurate readings in a non-
conservative direction resulting in
a mismatch between level
indicators.
This problem is particularly
prevalent after extended outages
when starting up from cold
shutdown conditions and at low
reactor pressures.
LER 85-006-02
(See LP Folder)
(Section X.C.1.j.
provides more
detail)


                                                                OPL171 .003
(
                                                                Revision 17
(e)
                                                                Page 21 of 54
Four other narrow range
(                                                               INSTRUCTOR NOTES
instruments are located in the
                      (e)   Four other narrow range             Associated with
control room, two above the
                            instruments are located in the     RFPT/Main Turbine
FWLCS level indicators on panel
                            control room, two above the         and HPCIIRCIC trip
9-5 (3-208A & D), one above
                            FWLCS level indicators on panel     instruments
HPCI (3-208B)and one above
                            9-5 (3-208A & D), one above
RCIC (3-208C)on panel 9-3.
                            HPCI (3-208B)and one above
OPL171 .003
                            RCIC (3-208C)on panel 9-3.
Revision 17
  (2) Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) 2 Analog meters
Page 21 of 54
      and 2 Digital meters .
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
                      (a)   -155 to +60 inches range
Associated with
                            covering normal operating range
RFPT/Main Turbine
                            and down to the lower instrument
and HPCIIRCIC trip
                            nozzle return
instruments
                      (b)   Referenced to instrument zero
(2)
                      (c)   Four MCR indicators on Panel 9-
Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) 2 Analog meters
                            5 monitor this range of level
and 2 Digital meters .
                            indication.
(a)
                      (d)   Calibrated for normal operating
-155 to +60 inches range
                            pressure and temperature
covering normal operating range
                      (e)   The level signal utilized by the
and down to the lower instrument
                            Wide Range instruments have
nozzle return
                            safety related functions and are
(b)
                            directed through the Analog Trip
Referenced to instrument zero
                            System.
(c)
                      (f)   Level indication for this range is Obj. V.B.12.
Four MCR indicators on Panel 9-
                            also provided on the Backup
5 monitor this range of level
                            Control Panel (25-32).
indication.
              (3)     Shutdown Vessel Flood Range (Flood-up
(d)
                      Range)
Calibrated for normal operating
                      (a)   oto +400 inches range covering
pressure and temperature
                            upper portion of reactor vessel
(e)
                      (b)   Referenced to instrument zero
The level signal utilized by the
                            Calibrated for cold conditions
Wide Range instruments have
                            <<212&deg;F, 0 psig)
safety related functions and are
                      (c)   Provides level indication during
directed through the Analog Trip
                            vessel flooding or cool down.
System.
(f)
Level indication for this range is
Obj. V.B.12.
also provided on the Backup
Control Panel (25-32).
(3)
Shutdown Vessel Flood Range (Flood-up
Range)
(a)
oto +400 inches range covering
upper portion of reactor vessel
(b)
Referenced to instrument zero
Calibrated for cold conditions
<<212&deg;F, 0 psig)
(c)
Provides level indication during
vessel flooding or cool down.


                                                              OPL171.003
(
                                                              Revision 17
Transient flashing effects can cause
                                                              Page 32 of 54
indicated level to oscillate or be
(                                                             INSTRUCTOR NOTES
erratic. As the reference leg refills,
                    Transient flashing effects can cause
the indicated level approaches a
                    indicated level to oscillate or be
more accurate water level indication .
                    erratic . As the reference leg refills,
The RVLlS mod decreases the time
                    the indicated level approaches a
necessary for this refill to occur
                    more accurate water level indication .
j.
                    The RVLlS mod decreases the time
Normal Control Range (Narrow Range) and
                    necessary for this refill to occur
Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) Level
  j. Normal Control Range (Narrow Range) and
Discrepancies
    Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) Level
(1)
    Discrepancies
Narrow Range level instrumentation is
    (1)     Narrow Range level instrumentation is
calibrated to be most accurate at rated
            calibrated to be most accurate at rated
temperature and pressure (particularly
            temperature and pressure (particularly
the instruments for FWLCS, since they
            the instruments for FWLCS , since they
are temperature compensated). At cold
            are temperature compensated). At cold
conditions the non-FWLCS instruments
            conditions the non-FWLCS instruments
read high (not temperature
            read high (not temperature
compensated).
            compensated).
(2)
    (2)   Wide Range instruments are also
Wide Range instruments are also
            calibrated for rated temperature and
calibrated for rated temperature and
            pressure
pressure
            (a)     The indicated level on the Wide         Obj. V.B.15
OPL171.003
                    Range (9-5) is also affected by
Revision 17
                    changes in the subcooling of
Page 32 of 54
                    recirculation water and the
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
                    amount of flow at the lower
(a)
                    (variable leg) tap.
The indicated level on the Wide
            (b)     At rated conditions with
Range (9-5) is also affected by
                    minimum recirculation flow the
changes in the subcooling of
                    Wide Range instruments are
recirculation water and the
                    accurate. As recirculation flow is
amount of flow at the lower
                    increased past the lower tap it
(variable leg) tap.
                    has a significant velocity head
Obj. V.B.15
                    and some friction loss which
(b)
                    reduces the pressure on the
At rated conditions with
                    variable leg to the differential
minimum recirculation flow the
                    pressure instrument, resulting in
Wide Range instruments are
                    an indicated level lower than
accurate. As recirculation flow is
                    actual. This could be as much
increased past the lower tap it
                    as 10-15 inches error when at
has a significant velocity head
                    rated flow and power.
and some friction loss which
            (c)     Due to calibration for rated
reduces the pressure on the
                    conditions and no density
variable leg to the differential
                    compensation at cold conditions
pressure instrument, resulting in
                    these instruments read high.
an indicated level lower than
actual. This could be as much
as 10-15 inches error when at
rated flow and power.
(c)
Due to calibration for rated
conditions and no density
compensation at cold conditions
these instruments read high.


  32. RO 219000K2 .02 00l/C/A/T2G2/0I-74//219000K2.02//RO/SRO/NEW 10/16/07
(
      Given the following plant conditions:
32. RO 219000K2.02 00l/C/A/T2G2/0I-74//219000K2.02//RO/SRO/NEW 10/16/07
                *   Unit-2 is at 100% rated power with RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling mode to support
Given the following plant conditions:
(                  a HPCI Full Flow test surveillance.
*
                *   Unit-1 experiences a LOCA which results in a CAS signal initiation on Unit-1 .
Unit-2 is at 100% rated power with RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling mode to support
      Which ONE of the following describes the current status of Unit-2 RHR system and what actions must be
a HPCI Full Flow test surveillance.
      taken to restore Suppression Pool Cooling on Unit-2?
*
      A. 2A and 2C RHR Pumps are tripped . 28 and 2D pumps are unaffected . No additional action is
Unit-1 experiences a LOCA which results in a CAS signal initiation on Unit-1.
          required.
Which ONE of the following describes the current status of Unit-2 RHR system and what actions must be
      B. 28 and 2D RHR Pumps are tripped. 2A and 2C pumps are unaffected. Place RHR Loop I in
taken to restore Suppression Pool Cooling on Unit-2?
          Suppression Pool Cooling immediately.
A.
      c.   All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling
2A and 2C RHR Pumps are tripped. 28 and 2D pumps are unaffected . No additional action is
          immediately.
required.
      D~   All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling after a 60
B. 28 and 2D RHR Pumps are tripped. 2A and 2C pumps are unaffected. Place RHR Loop I in
          second time delay .
Suppression Pool Cooling immediately.
      KIA Statement:
c. All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling
      219000 RHR/LPCI: Torus/Pool Cooling Mode
immediately.
      K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following : Pumps
D~ All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling after a 60
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
second time delay.
      plant conditions and times to determine which RHR pumps can be used for Suppression Pool Cooling.
KIA Statement:
      References: 2-01-74 , OPL 171.044
219000 RHR/LPCI: Torus/Pool Cooling Mode
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Pumps
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome . This requires mentally using this
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
plant conditions and times to determine which RHR pumps can be used for Suppression Pool Cooling.
      0610 NRC Exam
References: 2-01-74, OPL 171.044
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
  Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
(
  1. Response of Unit-2 RHR pumps due to a Unit 1 CAS initition.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  2. Recognize the difference between a Single Unit CAS and Simultaneous Unit CAS.
1. Response of Unit-2 RHR pumps due to a Unit 1 CAS initition.
  3. Recognize that Preferred and Non-preferred ECCS pumps do NOT apply with the given conditions.
2. Recognize the difference between a Single Unit CAS and Simultaneous Unit CAS.
  A is incorrect. This is plausible based on RHR Loop II being the Preferred pumps for Unit-2.
3. Recognize that Preferred and Non-preferred ECCS pumps do NOT apply with the given conditions.
  B is incorrect. This is plausible if taken from the perspective of Unit 1 operation, not Unit 2 operation.
A is incorrect. This is plausible based on RHR Loop II being the Preferred pumps for Unit-2.
  C is incorrect. This is plausible because all four RHR pumps on Unit 2 will trip, but they are locked out
B is incorrect. This is plausible if taken from the perspective of Unit 1 operation, not Unit 2 operation.
  from manual start for 60 seconds based on D/G and/or Shutdown Board loading concerns.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because all four RHR pumps on Unit 2 will trip, but they are locked out
  D is correct.
from manual start for 60 seconds based on D/G and/or Shutdown Board loading concerns.
D is correct.
(
(


      BFN             Residual Heat Removal System             2-01-74
(
      Unit2                                                     Rev. 0133
BFN
(                                                              Page 331 of 367
Residual Heat Removal System
                                        Appendix A
2-01-74
                                      (Page 2 of 7)
Unit2
                      Unit 1 & 2 Core Spray/RHR Logic Discussion
Rev. 0133
  2.2 ECCS Preferred Pump Logic
Page 331 of 367
      Concurrent Accident Signals On Unit 1 and Unit 2
Appendix A
      With normal power available, the starting and running of RHR pumps on a 4KV
(Page 2 of 7)
      Shutdown Board already loaded by the opposite unit's Core Spray, RHR pumps, and
Unit 1 & 2 Core Spray/RHR Logic Discussion
      RHRSW pumps could overload the affected 4KV Shutdown Boards and trip the
2.2
      normal feeder breaker. This would result in a temporary loss of power to the
ECCS Preferred Pump Logic
      affected 4KV Shutdown Boards while the boards are being transferred to their
Concurrent Accident Signals On Unit 1 and Unit 2
      diesels . To prevent this undesirable transient, Unit 2 RHR Pumps 2A and 2C are
With normal power available, the starting and running of RHR pumps on a 4KV
      load shed on a Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed
Shutdown Board already loaded by the opposite unit's Core Spray, RHR pumps, and
      on a Unit 2 accident signal. Unit 2 Core Spray Pumps 2A and 2C are load shed on a
RHRSW pumps could overload the affected 4KV Shutdown Boards and trip the
      Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Core Spray Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed on
normal feeder breaker. This would result in a temporary loss of power to the
      a Unit 2 accident signal. This makes the Preferred ECCS pumps Unit 1 Division I
affected 4KV Shutdown Boards while the boards are being transferred to their
      Core Spray and RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 2 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.
diesels. To prevent this undesirable transient, Unit 2 RHR Pumps 2A and 2C are
      Conversely, the Non-preferred ECCS pumps are Unit 1 Division 2 Core Spray and
load shed on a Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed
      RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 1 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.
on a Unit 2 accident signal. Unit 2 Core Spray Pumps 2A and 2C are load shed on a
      The preferred and non-preferred ECCS pumps are as follows:
Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Core Spray Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed on
              UNIT 1 & 2
a Unit 2 accident signal. This makes the Preferred ECCS pumps Unit 1 Division I
                  PREFERRED ECCS Pumps
Core Spray and RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 2 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.
                  CS1A,CS1C,RHR1A,RHR1C
Conversely, the Non-preferred ECCS pumps are Unit 1 Division 2 Core Spray and
                  CS 2B, CS 20, RHR 2B, RHR 20
RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 1 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.
                  NON-PREFERRED ECCS Pumps
The preferred and non-preferred ECCS pumps are as follows:
                  CS 1B, CS 10, RHR 1B, RHR 10
UNIT 1 & 2
                  CS2~CS2C,RHR2A,RHR2C
PREFERRED ECCS Pumps
              UNIT3
CS1A,CS1C,RHR1A,RHR1C
                  Unit 3 does not have ECCS Preferred/Non-Preferred Pump Logic.
CS 2B, CS 20, RHR 2B, RHR 20
      Accident Signal On One Unit
NON-PREFERRED ECCS Pumps
      With an accident on one unit, ECCS Preferred pump logic trips all running RHR and
CS 1B, CS 10, RHR 1B, RHR 10
      Core Spray pumps on the non-accident unit.
CS2~CS2C,RHR2A,RHR2C
UNIT3
Unit 3 does not have ECCS Preferred/Non-Preferred Pump Logic.
Accident Signal On One Unit
With an accident on one unit, ECCS Preferred pump logic trips all running RHR and
Core Spray pumps on the non-accident unit.


                                                                                        OPL171.044
                                                                                        Revision 15
                                                                                        Page 50 of 159
(                                                                              INSTRUCTOR NOTES
                                                    Note:
  Presently Unit 1 Accident signal will not affect Unit 2 due to DCN H2735A that lifted wires
  from relays. Unit 2 will still affect Unit 1. However, the following represents modifications
  to the inter-tie logic as it will be upon Unit 1 recovery.
                                                                                Obj. V.B.13.
                                                                                Obj. V.C.3
                        (1)  Unit 1 Preferred RHR pumps are 1A and 1C
                                                                                Obj. V.C.7
                                                                                Obj. V.D.6
                        (2)  Unit 2 Preferred RHR pumps are 28 and 2D          Obj. V.E.II
                        (3)  Unit 2 initiation logic is as follows:Div 1 RHR
                              logic initiates Div 1 pumps ( A and C), and Div
                              2 logic initiates Div 2 pumps (B and D)
                  f.  Accident Signal
                        (1)    LOCA signals are divided into two separate        Obj. V.B.13.
                              signals, one referred to as a Pre Accident        Obj. V.C.3
                              Signal (PAS) and the other referred to as a      Obj. V.C.7
                              Common Accident Signal (CAS) .                    Obj. V.D.6
                                                                                Obj. V.E.II
                                        * PAS
                                          -122" Rx water level (Level 1)        Note:
                                                                                It should be clear
                                                  OR
                                                                                that the only
                                          2.45 psig DW pressure                difference
                                        * CAS                                    between the two
                                                                                signals is the
                                          -122" Rx water level (Level 1)        inclusion of Rx
                                                  OR                            pressure in the
                                                                                CAS signal. The
                                          2.45 psig DW pressure AND <450        PAS signal is an
                                          psig Rx pressure                      anticipatory signal
                                                                                that allows the
                                                                                DG's to start on
                        (2)  If a unit receives an accident signal, then all  rising OW
                              its respective RHR and Core Spray pumps          pressure and be
                              will sequence on based upon power source to      ready should a
                              the SD Boards.                                    CAS be received.
                        (3)  All RHR and Core Spray pumps on the non-
                              affected unit will trip (if running) and will be
                              blocked from manual starting for 60 seconds.
(
(
OPL171.044
Revision 15
Page 50 of 159
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
Note:
Presently Unit 1 Accident signal will not affect Unit 2 due to DCN H2735A that lifted wires
from relays. Unit 2 will still affect Unit 1.
However, the following represents modifications
to the inter-tie logic as it will be upon Unit 1 recovery.
(
f.
(1)
Unit 1 Preferred RHR pumps are 1A and 1C
(2)
Unit 2 Preferred RHR pumps are 28 and 2D
(3)
Unit 2 initiation logic is as follows:Div 1 RHR
logic initiates Div 1 pumps ( A and C), and Div
2 logic initiates Div 2 pumps (B and D)
Accident Signal
(1)
LOCA signals are divided into two separate
signals, one referred to as a Pre Accident
Signal (PAS) and the other referred to as a
Common Accident Signal (CAS).
* PAS
-122" Rx water level (Level 1)
OR
2.45 psig DW pressure
* CAS
-122" Rx water level (Level 1)
OR
2.45 psig DW pressure AND <450
psig Rx pressure
(2)
If a unit receives an accident signal, then all
its respective RHR and Core Spray pumps
will sequence on based upon power source to
the SD Boards.
(3)
All RHR and Core Spray pumps on the non-
affected unit will trip (if running) and will be
blocked from manual starting for 60 seconds.
Obj. V.B.13.
Obj. V.C.3
Obj. V.C.7
Obj. V.D.6
Obj. V.E.II
Obj. V.B.13.
Obj. V.C.3
Obj. V.C.7
Obj. V.D.6
Obj. V.E.II
Note:
It should be clear
that the only
difference
between the two
signals is the
inclusion of Rx
pressure in the
CAS signal. The
PAS signal is an
anticipatory signal
that allows the
DG's to start on
rising OW
pressure and be
ready should a
CAS be received.


                                                                  OPL171 .044
OPL171.044
                                                                  Revision 15
Revision 15
                                                                    Page 51 of 159
Page 51 of 159
(                                                         INSTRUCTOR NOTES
(
    (4) After 60 seconds all RHR pumps on the non-       Operator diligence
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
          affected unit may be manually started .           required to
(4)
                                                            prevent
After 60 seconds all RHR pumps on the non-
    (5) The non-preferred pumps on the non-
Operator diligence
                                                            overloading SO
affected unit may be manually started.
          affected unit are also prevented from
required to
                                                            boards/DG's
(5)
          automatically starting until the affected unit's
The non-preferred pumps on the non-
          accident signal is clear.
prevent
    (6) The preferred pumps on the non-affected
overloading SO
          unit are locked out from automatically starting
affected unit are also prevented from
          until the affected unit accident signal is clear
boards/DG's
          OR the non-affected unit receives an
automatically starting until the affected unit's
          accident signal.
accident signal is clear.
  g. 4KV Shutdown Board Load Shed                           Obj. V.C .B.
(6)
    (1) A stripping of motor loads on the 4KV boards
The preferred pumps on the non-affected
        occurs when the board experiences an
unit are locked out from automatically starting
        undervoltage condition. This is referred to as a
until the affected unit accident signal is clear
        4KV Load Shed . This shed prepares the board
OR the non-affected unit receives an
        for the DG ensuring the DG will tie on to the
accident signal.
        bus unloaded and without faults.
g.
    (2) The Load Shed occurs when an undervoltage
4KV Shutdown Board Load Shed
        is experienced on the board i.e. or if the Diesel
Obj. V.C .B.
        were tied to the board (only source) and one of
(1)
        the units experienced an accident signal which
A stripping of motor loads on the 4KV boards
        trips the Diesel output breaker.
occurs when the board experiences an
    (3) Then, when the Diesel output breaker
undervoltage condition. This is referred to as a
          interlocks are satisfied, the DG output breaker
4KV Load Shed. This shed prepares the board
          would close and, if an initiation signal is
for the DG ensuring the DG will tie on to the
          present (CAS) the RHR, CS, and RHRSW
bus unloaded and without faults.
          pumps would sequence on
(2)
    (4) Following an initiation of a Common Accident
The Load Shed occurs when an undervoltage
          Signal (which trips the diesel breaker), if a
is experienced on the board i.e. or if the Diesel
          subsequent accident signal is received from
were tied to the board (only source) and one of
          another unit, a second diesel breaker trip on a
the units experienced an accident signal which
          "unit priority" basis is provided to ensure that
trips the Diesel output breaker.
          the Shutdown boards are stripped prior to
(3)
          starting the RHR pumps and other ECCS
Then, when the Diesel output breaker
          loads
interlocks are satisfied, the DG output breaker
    (5) When an accident signal trip of the diesel       Occurs due to
would close and, if an initiation signal is
          breakers is initiated from one unit (CASA or     actuation of the
present (CAS) the RHR, CS, and RHRSW
          CASB) , subsequent CAS trips of all eight       diesel breaker
pumps would sequence on
(        diesel breakers are blocked .                   TSCRN relay
(4)
Following an initiation of a Common Accident
Signal (which trips the diesel breaker), if a
subsequent accident signal is received from
another unit, a second diesel breaker trip on a
"unit priority" basis is provided to ensure that
the Shutdown boards are stripped prior to
starting the RHR pumps and other ECCS
loads
(5)
When an accident signal trip of the diesel
Occurs due to
breakers is initiated from one unit (CASA or
actuation of the
(
CASB), subsequent CAS trips of all eight
diesel breaker
diesel breakers are blocked.
TSCRN relay


  33. RO 226001A4.I2 OOlIMEM/T2G2/PC/P//226001A4.12/3.8/3.9/RO/SRO/
(
      Given the following plant conditions:
33. RO 226001A4.I2 OOlIMEM/T2G2/PC/P//226001A4.12/3.8/3.9/RO/SRO/
              *   A pipe break inside containment results in the below parameters:
Given the following plant conditions:
(                        - Drywell pressure is 20 psig
*
                        - Drywell temperature is 210&deg;F
A pipe break inside containment results in the below parameters:
                        - Suppression chamber pressure is 18 psig.
- Drywell pressure is 20 psig
                        - Suppression chamber temperature is 155&deg;F.
- Drywell temperature is 210&deg;F
                        - Suppression pool level is +2 inches
- Suppression chamber pressure is 18 psig.
                        - Reactor water level is +30 inches
- Suppression chamber temperature is 155&deg;F.
      Which ONE list of parameters below must ALWAYS be addressed to determine when it is appropriate to
- Suppression pool level is +2 inches
      spray the drywell?
- Reactor water level is +30 inches
      A.   -Suppression Chamber temperature
Which ONE list of parameters below must ALWAYS be addressed to determine when it is appropriate to
            -Drywell pressure
spray the drywell?
            -Drywell temperature
A.
      B.   -Suppression Chamber pressure
-Suppression Chamber temperature
            -Drywell temperature
-Drywell pressure
            -Suppression Pool level
-Drywell temperature
      C."   -Drywell pressure
B.
            -Drywell temperature
-Suppression Chamber pressure
            -Reactor water level
-Drywell temperature
      D.   -Reactor water level
-Suppression Pool level
            -Suppression Chamber temperature
C." -Drywell pressure
            -Drywell pressure
-Drywell temperature
      KIA Statement:
-Reactor water level
      226001 RHR/LPCI: CTMT Spray Mode
D.
      A4.12 - Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: ContainmenUdrywell pressure
-Reactor water level
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
-Suppression Chamber temperature
      knowledge of which containment parameters are used to determine when Contain merit Sprays can be
-Drywell pressure
      used.
KIA Statement:
      References: 1/2/3-EOI-2 Flowchart
226001 RHR/LPCI: CTMT Spray Mode
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
A4.12 - Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: ContainmenUdrywell pressure
      or recognize discrete bits of information.
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
      0610 NRC Exam
knowledge of which containment parameters are used to determine when Containmerit Sprays can be
used.
References: 1/2/3-EOI-2 Flowchart
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
(
  Plausibility Analysis:
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
Plausibility Analysis:
  1. Orywell temperature and pressure are always required to ensure Curve 5 limits are not exceeded.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
  2. RPV level is always required to verify adequate core cooling is assured prior to diverting RHR flow
1. Orywell temperature and pressure are always required to ensure Curve 5 limits are not exceeded.
    for Orywell sprays.
2. RPV level is always required to verify adequate core cooling is assured prior to diverting RHR flow
  3. Suppression Pool level is always required to verify Suppression Chamber to Orywell vacuum breakers
for Orywell sprays.
    are uncovered.
3. Suppression Pool level is always required to verify Suppression Chamber to Orywell vacuum breakers
  4. Suppression Chamber pressure is ONLY required when initiating Orywell Sprays from flowpath PC/Po
are uncovered.
  5. Suppression Chamber temperature is NOT required to initiate Orywell Sprays.
4. Suppression Chamber pressure is ONLY required when initiating Orywell Sprays from flowpath PC/Po
  A is incorrect. This is plaus ible because OW temp and press are required , but SC temp is not.
5. Suppression Chamber temperature is NOT required to initiate Orywell Sprays.
  B is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and SP level are required , but SC press is ONLY
A is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and press are required , but SC temp is not.
  required when initiating OW Sprays using PC/P o
B is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and SP level are required , but SC press is ONLY
  C is correct.
required when initiating OW Sprays using PC/Po
  D is incorrect. This is plausible because RPV level and OW press are required, but SC temp is not.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because RPV level and OW press are required, but SC temp is not.


                        WHEN     SUPPR CHMBR PRESS EXCEEDS 12 PSIG,
WHEN
                        THEN     CONnNUE INTHISPROCEDURE
SUPPR CHMBR PRESS EXCEEDS 12 PSIG,
                                                                            L
THEN
-_... _....----_..... __. __.._---------_ ...., ..
CONnNUE INTHISPROCEDURE
                                                  " ~'.
L
                                  PClP-7
-_..._....----_.....__.__.._---------_...., ..
                                                              L
"
                                SHUT DOWN RECIRC PUfA'PS ANDOWBLOWERS
~'.
                                                                            L
PClP-7
                        #2     PUMP NPSH AND VORTEX m"TS
L
                                                                            L
SHUT DOWNRECIRC PUfA'PS ANDOWBLOWERS
                          INITlAm r:JN SPRAYS USING W:lL:! PUMPSWIREQUJRED
# 2
                          ro ASSUREAIEQUATE OORE COOLING BY CON11NUOUS
PUMP NPSH AND VORTEX m"TS
                          INJ (APPX 178)
INITlAm r:JN SPRAYS USING W:lL:!PUMPSWIREQUJRED
                                                                            L
ro ASSUREAIEQUATE OORE COOLING BY CON11NUOUS
INJ(APPX 178)
L
L
L


                                                    :
::
                                                    :
L
                                  L                 !
!:!
                                                    :
~
                                          0"
"
                                              ,p'
,p'
                                                  ~
0"
                                                    !
..,J~"~
                                                    "
L
                                  .. ,J~"~
SHUT DOWN RSCIRC i'IIllW''S RJO r:1"BLO'/IB'tS
                                  L
L
S HUT DOWN RS CIRC i'IIllW''S RJO r:1" BLO'/ IB'tS
L
                                                      L
L
                                                      L
                                                      L


  34. RO 234000G2.4.50 OO l/C/NTIG2///234000G2.4.50/IRO/SRO/
(
      Given the following plant conditions:
34. RO 234000G2.4.50 OO l/C/NTIG2///234000G2.4.50/IRO/SRO/
              *     Fuel movement is in progress for channel changeou t activities in the Fuel Prep Machine.
Given the following plant conditions:
(              *   Gas bubbles are visible coming from the de-channeled bundle .
*
                *   An Area Radiation Monitor adjacent to the SFSP begins alarm ing.
Fuel movement is in progress for channel changeout activities in the Fuel Prep Machine.
      Wh ich ONE of the following describes the action (s) to take?
*
      Immediately STOP fuel handling, then           _
Gas bubbles are visible coming from the de-channeled bundle.
      A.     notify RADCON to monitor & evaluate radiation levels.
*
      B."   evacuate non-essential personnel from the RFF.
An Area Radiation Monitor adjacent to the SFSP begins alarming.
      C.     evacuate ALL personnel from the RFF .
Which ONE of the following describes the action (s) to take?
      D.   obtain Reactor Engineering Supervisor's recommendation for movement and sipping of the
Immediately STOP fuel handling, then
            damaged fuel assembly.
_
      KIA Statement:
A.
      234000 Fuel Handling Equipment
notify RADCON to monitor & evaluate radiation levels.
      2.4.50 - Emergency Procedures / Plan Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls
B."
      identified in the alarm response manual
evacuate non-essential personnel from the RFF.
      KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
C.
      plant conditions to determine the corrective actions involving Fuel Handling equipment under emergency
evacuate ALL personnel from the RFF.
      conditions.
D.
      References:     1/2/3-AOI-79-1 & 79-2 , 1/2/3-ARP-9-3A (W1)
obtain Reactor Engineering Supervisor's recommendation for movement and sipping of the
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
damaged fuel assembly.
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
KIA Statement:
      knowledge and its mean ing to predict the correct outcome.
234000 Fuel Handling Equipment
      0610 NRC Exam
2.4.50 - Emergency Procedures / Plan Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls
identified in the alarm response manual
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the corrective actions involving Fuel Handling equipment under emergency
conditions.
References:
1/2/3-AOI-79-1 & 79-2, 1/2/3-ARP-9-3A (W1)
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam


  REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
(
  Plausibility Analvsis:
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
( In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
Plausibility Analvsis:
  1. Whether indications are consistent with fuel damage or inadvertant criticality.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
  2. Based on the answer to Item 1 above, enter the appropriate AOI.
1. Whether indications are consistent with fuel damage or inadvertant criticality.
  3. Immediate Operator Actions for the selected procedure, AOI-70-1.
2. Based on the answer to Item 1 above, enter the appropriate AOI.
  A is incorrect. This is plausible because RADCON notification is a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,
3. Immediate Operator Actions for the selected procedure, AOI-70-1.
  however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action .
A is incorrect. This is plausible because RADCON notification is a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,
  B is correct.
however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.
  C is incorrect. This is plausible because evacuation of ALL personnel is an IMMEDIATE action in
B is correct.
  AOI-70-2 , however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action in the appropriate AOI.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because evacuation of ALL personnel is an IMMEDIATE action in
  D is incorrect. This is plausible because RE recommendations are a subsequent action in AOI-70-1 ,
AOI-70-2 , however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action in the appropriate AOI.
  however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because RE recommendations are a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,
however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.


          BFN                           Panel 9-3                     2-ARP-9-3A
BFN
        Unit2                         2-XA-55-3A                     Rev. 0036
Panel 9-3
(                                                                      Page 4 of 50
2-ARP-9-3A
                                SensorlTrip Point:
(
        FUEL POOL
Unit2
      FLOOR AREA
2-XA-55-3A
    RADIATION HIGH             RI-90-1 B
Rev. 0036
                                RI-90-2B                 For setpo ints
Page 4 of 50
        2-RA-90-1A             RI-90-3B                 REFER TO 2-SIMI-90B.
FUEL POOL
                      11
SensorlTrip Point:
        (Page 1 of 1)
FLOOR AREA
  Sensor         RE-90-1 B              EI664'           R-11 P-L1NE
RADIATION HIGH
  Location:       RE-90-2B               E1664'           R-10 U-L1NE
RI-90-1B
                  RE-90-3B               E1639'           R-10 Q-L1NE
RI-90-2B
  Probable       A. Change in general radiation levels.
For setpoints
  Cause:          B. Refueling accident.
2-RA-90-1A
                  C. Sensor malfunction.
RI-90-3B
  Automatic      None
REFER TO 2-SIMI-90B.
  Action:
11
  Operator        A. CHECK 2-RI-90-1A, 2-RI-90-2A and 2-RI-90-3A on Panel 2-9-11.       o
(Page 1 of 1)
  Action:        B. NOTIFY refuel floor personnel.                                     o
Sensor
                  C. IF Dry Cask loading/unloading activities are in progress, THEN
RE-90-1B
                      NOTIFY Cask Supervisor.                                           o
EI664'
                  D. IF airborne levels rise by 100 DAC AND RADCON confirms, THEN
R-11 P-L1NE
                      REFER TO EPIP-1.                                                 o
Location:
                  E. REFER TO 2-AOI-79-1 or 2-AOI-79-2 as applicable.                   o
RE-90-2B
                  F. IF this alarm is not valid, THEN REFER TO 0-01-55.                 o
E1664'
                  G. IF this alarm is valid , THEN
R-10 U-L1NE
                      MONITOR the other parameters that input to it frequently. These
RE-90-3B
                      other parameters will be masked from alarming while this alarm is
E1639'
                      sealed in.                                                       o
R-10 Q-L1NE
                  H. ENTER 2-EOI-3 Flowchart.                                           o
Probable
  References:    0-47E600-13                   2-47E61 0-90-1             2-45E620-3
Cause:
                  GE 730E356 Series, TVA Calc NDQ00902005001/EDC63693
Automatic
Action:
Operator
Action:
References:
A. Change in general radiation levels.
B. Refueling accident.
C. Sensor malfunction.
None
A.
CHECK 2-RI-90-1A, 2-RI-90-2A and 2-RI-90-3A on Panel 2-9-11.
B. NOTIFY refuel floor personnel.
C. IF Dry Cask loading/unloading activities are in progress, THEN
NOTIFY Cask Supervisor.
D. IF airborne levels rise by 100 DAC AND RADCON confirms, THEN
REFER TO EPIP-1.
E. REFER TO 2-AOI-79-1 or 2-AOI-79-2 as applicable.
F. IF this alarm is not valid, THEN REFER TO 0-01-55.
G. IF this alarm is valid, THEN
MONITOR the other parameters that input to it frequently. These
other parameters will be masked from alarming while this alarm is
sealed in.
H. ENTER 2-EOI-3 Flowchart.
0-47E600-13
2-47E610-90-1
2-45E620-3
GE 730E356 Series, TVA Calc NDQ00902005001/EDC63693
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o


      BFN               Fuel Damage During Refueling           2-AOI-79-1
(
      Unit 2                                                     Rev. 0017
BFN
(                                                                Page 3 of7
Fuel Damage During Refueling
  1.0   PURPOSE
2-AOI-79-1
      This instruction provides the symptoms, automatic actions and operator actions for a
Unit 2
      fuel damage accident.
Rev. 0017
  2.0 SYMPTOMS
Page 3 of7
      A.   Possible annunciators in alarm:
1.0
            1.   FUEL POOL FLOOR AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 1).
PURPOSE
            2.   AIR PARTICULATE MONITOR RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
This instruction provides the symptoms, automatic actions and operator actions for a
                  window 2).
fuel damage accident.
            3.   RX BLDG, TURB BLDG, RF ZONE EXH RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
2.0
                  window 4).
SYMPTOMS
            4.   REACTOR ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 21).
A.
            5.   RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 22).
Possible annunciators in alarm:
            6.   REFUELING ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
1.
                  window 34).
FUEL POOL FLOOR AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 1).
      B.   Gas bubbles visible, in the Spent Fuel Storage Pool and/or Reactor Cavity,
2.
            attributed to physical fuel damage.
AIR PARTICULATE MONITOR RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
      C.   Known dropped or physically damaged fuel bundle.
window 2).
      D.   Portable CAM in alarm.
3.
      E.   Radiation level on the Refuel Floor is greater than 25 mr/hr and cause is
RX BLDG, TURB BLDG, RF ZONE EXH RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
            unknown.
window 4).
4.
REACTOR ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 21).
5.
RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 22).
6.
REFUELING ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
window 34).
B.
Gas bubbles visible, in the Spent Fuel Storage Pool and/or Reactor Cavity,
attributed to physical fuel damage.
C.
Known dropped or physically damaged fuel bundle.
D.
Portable CAM in alarm.
E.
Radiation level on the Refuel Floor is greater than 25 mr/hr and cause is
unknown.


      BFN               Fuel Damage During Refueling           2-AOI-79-1
BFN
      Unit2                                                       Rev. 0017
Fuel Damage During Refueling
                                                                  Page 5 of 7
2-AOI-79-1
4.0     OPERATOR ACTIONS
Unit2
4.1     Immediate Actions
Rev. 0017
        [1]   STOP all fuel handling.                                                   o
Page 5 of 7
        [2]   EVACUATE all non-essential personnel from Refuel Floor.                   o
4.0
4.2     Subsequent Actions
OPERATOR ACTIONS
                                          CAUTION
4.1
The release of iodine is of major concern. If gas bubbles are identified at any time, Iodine
Immediate Actions
release should be assumed until RADCON determines otherwise.
[1]
        [1]   VERIFY secondary containment is intact.
STOP all fuel handling.
              (REFER TO Tech Spec 3.6.4.1)                                               n
[2]
        [2]   IF any EOI entry condition is met, THEN
EVACUATE all non-essential personnel from Refuel Floor.
              ENTER the appropriate EOI(s).                                             o
4.2
        [3]   VERIFY automatic actions.                                                 o
Subsequent Actions
        [4]   NOTIFY RADCON to perform the following:
CAUTION
              *     EVALUATE the radiation levels.                                       0
o
              *     MAKE recommendation for personnel access.                           0
o
              *     MONITOR around the Reactor Building Equipment Hatch,
The release of iodine is of major concern. If gas bubbles are identified at any time, Iodine
                    at levels below the Refuel Floor, for possible spread of the
release should be assumed until RADCON determines otherwise.
                    release.                                                             0
[1]
        [5]   REFER TO EPIP-1 for proper notification.                                   o
VERIFY secondary containment is intact.
(REFER TO Tech Spec 3.6.4.1)
[2]
IF any EOI entry condition is met, THEN
ENTER the appropriate EOI(s).
[3]
VERIFY automatic actions.
[4]
NOTIFY RADCON to perform the following:
n
o
o
*
EVALUATE the radiation levels.
0
*
MAKE recommendation for personnel access.
0
*
MONITOR around the Reactor Building Equipment Hatch,
at levels below the Refuel Floor, for possible spread of the
release.
0
[5]
REFER TO EPIP-1 for proper notification.
o


      BFN              Fuel Damage During Refueling        2-AOI-79-1
      Unit 2                                                Rev. 0017
(                                                          Page 6 of 7
  4.2  Subsequent Actions (continued)
      [6]  MONITOR radiation levels, for the affected areas, using the
            following radiation recorders and indicators:
            A.  2-RR-90-1 (points 1 and 2), 2-MON-90-50 (Address 11),
                  2-RR-90-142 and 2-RR-90-140 (Panel 2-9-2) .            0
            B.  2-RM-90-142, 2-RM-90-140, 2-RM-90-143
                  and 2-RM-90-141 Detectors A and B (Panel 2-9-10).      0
            C.  2-RI-90-1A and 2-RI-90-2A (Panel 2-9-11).              0
            D.  0-CONS-90-362A (Address 09, 10, 08) for Unit 1, 2,
                  3-RM-90-250, respectively (Panel 1-9-44).              0
      [7]  IF possible, MONITOR portable CAMs & ARMs.
      [8]  REQUEST Chemistry to perform 0-SI-4.8.8.2-1 to determine if
            iodine concentration has risen .                            0
      [9]  NOTIFY Reactor Engineering Supervisor, or his designee, and
            OBTAIN recommendation for movement and sipping of the
            damaged fuel assembly.                                      0
      [10]  OBTAIN Plant Managers approval prior to resuming any fuel
            transfer operations.                                        0
      [11]  WHEN condition has cleared AND if required, THEN
            RETURN ventilation systems, including SGTS, to normal.
            REFER TO 2-01-30A, 2-01-30B, 0-01-30F, 0-01-31,
            and 0-01-65.                                                0
(
(
(
BFN
Fuel Damage During Refueling
2-AOI-79-1
Unit 2
Rev. 0017
Page 6 of 7
4.2
Subsequent Actions (continued)
[6]
MONITOR radiation levels, for the affected areas, using the
following radiation recorders and indicators:
A.
2-RR-90-1 (points 1 and 2), 2-MON-90-50 (Address 11),
2-RR-90-142 and 2-RR-90-140 (Panel 2-9-2) .
0
B.
2-RM-90-142, 2-RM-90-140, 2-RM-90-143
and 2-RM-90-141 Detectors A and B (Panel 2-9-10).
0
C.
2-RI-90-1A and 2-RI-90-2A (Panel 2-9-11).
0
D.
0-CONS-90-362A (Address 09, 10, 08) for Unit 1, 2,
3-RM-90-250, respectively (Panel 1-9-44).
0
[7]
IF possible, MONITOR portable CAMs &ARMs.
[8]
REQUEST Chemistry to perform 0-SI-4.8.8.2-1 to determine if
iodine concentration has risen.
0
[9]
NOTIFY Reactor Engineering Supervisor, or his designee, and
OBTAIN recommendation for movement and sipping of the
damaged fuel assembly.
0
[10]
OBTAIN Plant Managers approval prior to resuming any fuel
transfer operations.
0
[11]
WHEN condition has cleared AND if required, THEN
RETURN ventilation systems, including SGTS, to normal.
REFER TO 2-01-30A, 2-01-30B, 0-01-30F, 0-01-31,
and 0-01-65.
0


      BFN              Inadvertent Criticality During Incore    2-AOI-79-2
      Unit 2                      Fuel Movements                  Rev. 0013
                                                                  Page 5 of 8
  4.0  OPERATOR ACTIONS
  4.1  Immediate Actions
        [1 ]    IF unexpected criticality is observed following control rod
                withdrawal, THEN
                REINSERT the control rod.                                          0
        [2]      IF all control rods CANNOT be fully inserted, THEN
                MANUALLY SCRAM the reactor.                                        0
        [3]      IF unexpected criticality is observed following the insertion of a
                fuel assembly, THEN
                PERFORM the following:                                            0
            [3.1]      VERIFY fuel grapple latched onto the fuel assembly
                        handle AND immediately REMOVE the fuel assembly
                        from the reactor core.                                      0
            [3.2]      IF the reactor can be determined to be subcritical AND
                        no radiological hazard is apparent, THEN
                        PLACE the fuel assembly in a spent fuel storage pool
                        location with the least possible number of surrounding
                        fuel assemblies, leaving the fuel grapple latched to the
                        fuel assembly handle.                                      0
            [3.3]      IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical
                        OR adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN
                        TRAVERSE the refueling bridge and fuel assembly
                        away from the reactor core, preferably to the area of the
                        cattle chute, AND CONTINUE at Step 4.1[4].                  0
        [4]      IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical OR
                adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN
                EVACUATE the refuel floor .                                        0
(
(
BFN
Inadvertent Criticality During Incore
2-AOI-79-2
Unit 2
Fuel Movements
Rev. 0013
Page 5 of 8
4.0
OPERATOR ACTIONS
4.1
Immediate Actions
[1 ]
IF unexpected criticality is observed following control rod
withdrawal, THEN
REINSERT the control rod.
0
[2]
IF all control rods CANNOT be fully inserted, THEN
MANUALLY SCRAM the reactor.
0
[3]
IF unexpected criticality is observed following the insertion of a
fuel assembly, THEN
PERFORM the following:
0
[3.1]
VERIFY fuel grapple latched onto the fuel assembly
handle AND immediately REMOVE the fuel assembly
from the reactor core.
0
[3.2]
IF the reactor can be determined to be subcritical AND
no radiological hazard is apparent, THEN
PLACE the fuel assembly in a spent fuel storage pool
location with the least possible number of surrounding
fuel assemblies, leaving the fuel grapple latched to the
fuel assembly handle.
0
[3.3]
IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical
OR adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN
TRAVERSE the refueling bridge and fuel assembly
away from the reactor core, preferably to the area of the
cattle chute, AND CONTINUE at Step 4.1[4].
0
[4]
IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical OR
adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN
EVACUATE the refuel floor.
0


  35. RO 245000K6.04 OOI /C/A/TIG2/0I-35//245000K6.04/fRO/SRO/Il/28/07 RMS
(
      Given the following plant conditions:
35. RO 245000K6.04 OOI/C/A/TIG2/0I-35//245000K6.04/fRO/SRO/Il/28/07 RMS
                *   Unit 2 is operating at 100% power.
Given the following plant conditions:
(              *   Main Generator is at 1150 MWe.
*
                *   The Chattanooga Load Coordinator requires a 0.95 lagging power factor.
Unit 2 is operating at 100% power.
                *   Generator hydrogen pressure is 65 psig.
*
      Wh ich ONE of the following describes the required action and reason if Generator hydrogen pressure
Main Generator is at 1150 MWe.
      drops to 45 psig?
*
      REFERENCE PROVIDED
The Chattanooga Load Coordinator requires a 0.95 lagging power factor.
      A.   Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Pole slippage
*
          will not occur at this power factor.
Generator hydrogen pressure is 65 psig.
      B~ Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Sufficient cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen
Which ONE of the following describes the required action and reason if Generator hydrogen pressure
          pressure.
drops to 45 psig?
      C.   Reduce generator load below 800 MWe . Pole slippage will not occur at this generator load.
REFERENCE PROVIDED
      D. Reduce excitation to obta in a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Suffic ient
A.
          cooling capab ility still exists at this hydrogen pressure.
Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Pole slippage
      KJA Statement:
will not occur at this power factor.
      245000 Main Turb ine Gen . / Aux .
B~ Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Sufficient cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen
      K6.04 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the MAIN TURBINE
pressure.
      GENERATOR AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS : Hydrogen cooling
C.
      KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use spec ific
Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Pole slippage will not occur at this generator load.
      plant conditions to determine the effect of a loss of hydrogen cooling on Main Generator operation.
D. Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Sufficient
      Reference Provided: Generator Capability Curve without axis labeled
cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen pressure.
      Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requ irement to assemble,
KJA Statement:
      sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requi res mentally using this
245000 Main Turbine Gen. / Aux .
      knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
K6.04 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the MAIN TURBINE
      0610 NRC Exam
GENERATOR AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS : Hydrogen cooling
KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the effect of a loss of hydrogen cooling on Main Generator operation.
Reference Provided: Generator Capability Curve without axis labeled
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requi res mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam


REFERENCE PROVIDED: Generator Capability Curve without the axis labeled.
REFERENCE PROVIDED: Generator Capability Curve without the axis labeled.
Plausibility Analysis:
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Current operating point on the Generator Capability Curve based on given condiions.
1. Current operating point on the Generator Capability Curve based on given condiions.
2. Recognize that pole slippage is only a concern when operating with a significant leading power factor.
2. Recognize that pole slippage is only a concern when operating with a significant leading power factor.
3. Recognize that pole slippage is a result of under excitation, not excessive generator load.
3. Recognize that pole slippage is a result of under excitation, not excessive generator load.
4. Recognize that generator hydrogen pressure is directly related to cooling capability.
4. Recognize that generator hydrogen pressure is directly related to cooling capability.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the
A is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the
generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. However, pole slippage is not a
generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. However, pole slippage is not a
Line 2,826: Line 4,133:
B is correct.
B is correct.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because generator load is properly reduced, but the basis for the
C is incorrect. This is plausible because generator load is properly reduced, but the basis for the
reduction is not related to slipping poles .
reduction is not related to slipping poles.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the
D is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the
generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. In addition, insufficient hydrogen
generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. In addition, insufficient hydrogen
pressure exists at the current generator load even wih a power factor of unity .
pressure exists at the current generator load even wih a power factor of unity.
}}
}}

Latest revision as of 16:43, 14 January 2025

Feb-Mar 05000259/2008301 Exam Draft RO Written Exam (Part 2 of 4)
ML081370218
Person / Time
Site: Browns Ferry Tennessee Valley Authority icon.png
Issue date: 04/08/2008
From:
NRC/RGN-II/DRS/OLB
To:
Tennessee Valley Authority
References
50-259/08-301 50-259/08-301
Download: ML081370218 (86)


See also: IR 05000259/2008301

Text

(7)

CASx (CASA or CASB) accident signal

(after 5 second delay via BBRX relay)

OPL171.036

Revision 11

Page 24 of 58

-122" RxVL OR

2.45 DWP AND

< 450# RPV

I.

4kV Shutdown Boards

(Normal Power Seeking)

1.

Power sources

a.

4kV supplies to each U1/2 Shutdown Board:

are as follows:

Board

NORMAL Supply

A

Shutdown Bus 1

B

Shutdown Bus 1

C

Shutdown Bus 2

D

Shutdown Bus 2

The first alternate is from the other Shutdown

Bus. The second alternate is from the diesel

generator. The third alternate is from the U3

diesel generators via a U3 Shutdown Board.

b.

There are two possible 4kV supplies to each

U3 Shutdown Board:

Board

NORMAL Supply

3EA

Unit Board 3A

3EB

Unit Board 3A

3EC

Unit Board 3B

3ED

Unit Board 3B

(1)

The first alternate is from the diesel

generators. The U1/2 diesel

generators cannot supply power to the

U3 Shutdown Boards alone. They

may, however, be paralleled with the

U3 diesel generators for backfeed

operation. The tie breaker off the unit 3

Shutdown Board is interlocked as

follows:

Refer to prints

15E-500 series Key

Diagram of STDBY

Aux. Power System

Obj. V.B.6.c

Obj. V.C.1.c

Obj. V.D.6.c

SBO

3

% via bustie

board

%

% via other

SO Bus

7.

Shutdown Board Transfer Scheme

a.

The only automatic transfer of power on a

shutdown board is a delayed (slow) transfer.

In order for the transfer to take place, the bus

transfer control switch (43Sx) must be in

AUTOMATIC.

OPL171.036

Revision 11

Page 31 of 58

Obj. V.B.8.c

Obj. V.C.2.c

Obj. V.D.8.c

Procedural

Adherence when

transferring

boards

(

    • b

(1)

Undervoltage is sensed on the line

side of the normal feeder breaker.

(2)

Voltage is available on the line side of

the alternate feeder breaker.

(3)

The normal feeder breaker then

receives a trip signal.

(4)

A 52b contact on the normal supply

breaker shuts in the close circuit of

the alternate feeder breaker,

indicating that the normal breaker is

open.

(5)

A residual voltage relay shuts in the

close circuit of the alternate supply

breaker, indicating that ooara voltage

bas decayed to less than 30 percent

of normal.

(6)

The alternate supply breaker then

closes.

The shutdown board transfer scheme is

NORMAL seeking. If power is restored

to the line side of the normal feeder

breaker, and if the 43Sx switch is still in

AUTOMATIC, then a "slow" transfer

back to the normal supply will occur.

This will cause momentary power loss

to loads on the bus and ESF actuations

are possible.

Manual High Speed (Fast Transfer)

To fast transfer a shutdown board perform the

following:

Obj. V.B.8.c

Obj. V.C.2.c

Review INPO

SOER 83-06

OPL171.036

Revision 11

Page 32 of 58

(

(1)

Ensure voltage is available from the

Procedural

alternate source.

Adherence

(2)

Place 43Sx switch to MANUAL.

(3)

Place alternate breaker SYNC switch

Self Check

to ON.

(4)

Place alternate supply breaker switch

in CLOSE.

(5)

Place normal supply breaker switch in

TRIP.

(6)

Alternate breaker closes when 52b

Alternate supply is

contact from normal breaker closes,

not a qualified Off-

indicating that breaker has opened. If

site supply

the Alternate Supply from SO Bus is

closed to a Unit 1/2 SID Board, an

Accident Signal will trip it open.

(7)

Turn off SYNC switch.

(8)

DO NOT place 43Sx switch back to

AUTOMATIC (Transfer back to

normal supply would occur).

Note: If the SYNC SW was not ON for

Self Check

the alternate breaker, a delayed

transfer would occur when the

normal breaker opens and the

board residual voltage relay

detects less than 30% voltage,

assuming the alternate breaker's

control switch is held in the

CLOSE position.

c.

Conditions which automatically trip the board

transfer control switch (43Sx) to MANUAL:

(1 )

Normal Feeder Lockout Relay (86-xxx)

(2)

Alternate Feeder Lockout Relay (86-

,xxx)

(3)

Normal Feeder Control Transfer Switch

in EMERGENCY

(4)

Alternate Feeder Control Transfer

-122" RxVL

Switch in EMERGENCY

OR

(

(5)

CASx accident signal

2.45 DWP AND

< 450# RPV

( .


20. RO 262002Al.02 OO l/C/Am/GI/UNIT PREFFERRED/C/A 2.5/2.9/262002AA l.02/BF0530I/RO/SRO/lO/27/2007

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 3 is in a normal lineup.

The following alarm is received :

- UNIT PFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL

It is determined that the alarm is due to the Unit-3 Unit Preferred AC Generator Overvoltage

condition

Which ONE of the following describes the correct result of this condition? Assume NO Operator actions.

A.

Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.

B. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.

C~ Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set continues to run without

excitation.

D. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set continues to run without

excitation.

KIA Statement:

262002 UPS (AC/DC)

KIA: A1.02 Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the

UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (A.C./D.C.) controls including: Motor generator outputs.

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to correctly apply

a specific operating condition of the UPS MMG Set to the correct response of the system to that condition.

References: OPL171 .102, Rev.6, pg 20 & 21, 3-ARP-9-8B, Rev.9, tile 35

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to solve a problem. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to resolve the problem .

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. The 1001 and 1003 breakers from an MMG set will trip on overvoltage or underfrequency at the output

of the MMG.

2. Unit 2 MMG Breakers are interlocked to prevent alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at the same time.

3. When an overvoltage condition exists at the Generator Output, the 1001 breaker from the MMG Set

trips.

4. Excitation is lost and the MMG Set continues to run.

5. The Hold to build up voltage switch must be depressed to restore voltage.Also

A is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible because the breaker

lineup is correct.

B is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible although the breaker

lineup is backwards.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. The breaker lineup is backwards. This is plausible because the MMG Set will continue to

run without excitation.

(

(

BFN

Unit 1

Panel 1-9-8

1-XA-55-8B

Senso rlTrip Point:

1-ARP-9-8B

Rev. 0009

Page 42 of 42

UNIT PFD

SUPPLY

ABNORMAL

(Page 1 of 1)

Relay SE - loss of normal DC power source .

Relay TS - DC Xfer switch transfers to Emergency DC Power Source.

Regulating Transformer Common Alarm.

1-INV-252-001 , INVT-1 System Common Alarm .

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

EL 593' 250V DC Battery Board 2

A.

Loss of normal DC power source

B. DC power transfer.

C. Relay failure

D. INVT-1 System Common Alarms

1.

Fan Failure Rectifier

2.

Over temperature Rectifier

3.

AC Power Failure to Rectifier

4.

Low DC Voltage

5.

High DC Voltage

6.

Low DC Disconnect

7.

Fan Failure Inverter

8.

Alternate Source Failure

9.

Low AC Output Voltage

10. High Output Voltage

11. Inverter Fuse Blown

12. Static Switch Fuse Blown

13. Over Temperature Inverter

E. PFD Regulating XFMR Common Alarms

1.

Transformer Over temperature

2.

Fan Failure

3.

CB1 Breaker Trip

4.

CB2 Breaker Trip

Auto transfer to DC Power Source on Rectifier failure .

Auto transfer to Alternate AC supply (Regulated Transformer) on Inverter failure.

Automatic

A.

Action:

B.

Operator

A.

Action:

B.

IF 120V AC Unit Preferred is lost, THEN

REFER TO 1-AOI-57-4, Loss of Unit Preferred .

REFER TO appropriate portion of 0-OI-57C, 208V/120V AC

Electrical System.

o

o

References:

0-45E641-2

10-100467

1-45E620-11

0-20-100756

1-3300D15A4585-1

20-110437

(

b.

(d)

Another Unit's MMG set

The second alternate is from

another unit's MMG set

output. Unit 2 MMG is the

second alternate for either

Unit 1 or Unit 3; Unit 3 is the

second alternate for Unit 2.

Transfers to this source are

done manually at Battery

Board 2 panel 11.

MMG Sets (Unit 2&3)

(1)

The MMG is normally driven By the

AC motor, powered from 480V

Shutdown Board A. Should this

supply fail, the AC motor is

automatically disconnected and the

DC motor starts, powered from

250V Battery Board. The DC

motor has an alternate power

supply from another 250V Battery

Board. Transfer to the alternate

DC source is manual.

Underfrequency on the generator

output will trip the DC motor.

Transfer of the MMG set back to

the AC motor is manual.

(2)

The 1001 and 1003 breakers from

an MMG set will trip on overvoltage

or underfrequency at the output of

the MMG. Also Unit 2 MMG

Breakers are interlocked to prevent

alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at

the same time.

OPL171.102

Revision 6

Page 20 of 69

Obj. V.B.2.b

TP-11

Obj'v.D.2.c

Obj.V.D.2.d/j

Obj V.E.2.c

Obj'v.E.2.d/i

Obj V.B.2.h

Obj'v.C.3.e

Obj'v.D.2.j

Obj'v.E.2.i

(3)

When an under frequency or

overvoltage condition exists at the

Generator Output the following

occurs

(a)

BB panel 10 breakers from

the MMG Set trip.

OPL171.102

Revision 6

Page 21 of 69

Obj. V.B.2.h

Obj. V.C.3.e

Obj. V.D.2.j

Obj. V.E.2.i

U2

U3

1001 (U2)

1001 (U3)

1003 (U1&3)

1003 (U2)

(b)

Excitation is lost and the

MMG Set continues to run.

(The Hold to build up

voltage switch must be

depressed to restore

voltage.)

(

(

21. RO 263000KI .02 00I/MEMlT2G I1250VDC/3/263000KI .02//RO/SROI

Wh ich ONE of the following statements describes the operation of 250 VDC Battery Charger 2B?

A.

The normal power supply to Battery Charger 2B is 480V Common Board 1.

8.

Battery Charger 2B can supply . directly from unit 2 Battery Board room, any of the six Unit & Plant

250VDC battery boards.

C.

Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying two Battery Boards simultaneously.

0 .01

Load shedding of the battery charger can be bypassed by placing the Emergency ON select

switch in the Emergency ON Position.

KIA Statement:

263000 DC Electrical Distribution

K1.02 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between D.C.

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and the following: Battery charger and battery

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of battery charger operation.

References:

OPL171.037

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Normal and Alternate power to Battery Charger 2B.

2. Loads capable of being supplied by Battery Charger 2B.

3. Load Shedding logic and bypass capability.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because 480V Common Board 1 is the Alternate supply to Battery

Charger 2B.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying any of the six 250V

Battery Boards, but NOT directly from Unit 2 Battery Board Room.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is sufficiently large enough to support the

loads, but mechanical interlocks prevent closing more than one output feeder breaker.

D is correct.

(

(2)

The Plant/Station Batteries (4, 5, and 6) are

Class Non-1E and are utilized primarily for U-2,

U-1, and U-3 respectively --for normal loads

OPL 171.037

Revision 10

Page 11 of 70

Obj V.B.1

Obj. V.C.1

Obj. V.D.1

(3)

Battery (4) Room is located on Unit 3 in the

Turbine Building on Elev. 586

(4)

Battery (5 & 6) Rooms are located on the

Turbine Floor, Elev. 617

(5)

The boards and chargers for the Unit Batteries

are located in Battery Board Rooms adjacent

to the batteries they serve, with the spare

charger being in the Unit 2 Battery Board

room. (Battery Boards 5 & 6 and their

associated chargers are located adjacent to

the batteries, but are in the open space of the

turbine floor.)

c.

250V Plant DC components

(1)

Battery charger

(a)

The battery chargers are of the solid state

rectifier type. They normally supply loads

on the 250V Plant DC Distribution

System. Upon loss of power to the

charger, the battery supplies the loads.

(b)

The main bank chargers only provide

float and equalize charge when tied to

their loads. The chargers are not placed

on fast charge (high voltage equalize)

with any loads attached.

(c)

They can recharge a fully discharged

battery in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> while supplying

normal loads.

(d)

Battery charger power supplies are

Follow Procedure

manual transfer only.

(

250V Battery

Normal Source

Alternate Source

Charaer

(Charger Service bus)

1

480V SD Bd 1A

480V Common Bd 1

Comp 6D

Comp 3A

2A

480V SD Bd 2A

480V Common Bd 1

Comp6D

Comp 3A

2B

480V SD Bd 2B

480V Common Bd 1

Comp6D

Comp 3A

3

480V SD Bd 3A

480V Common Bd 1

Comp 6D

Comp3A

Obj. V.B.2

Obj. V.C.2

Obj V.D.2

(

4

5

480V SO Bd 3B

Com

60

480V Com Bd 1

Com

5C

480V Common Bd 1

Com

3A

(no alternate)

OPL171.037

Revision 10

Page 12 of 70

6

480~o~or;gd 3

(no alternate)

2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four

feeders. Three DC outputs can be connected to battery board 1,

2, or 3. The fourth output is connected to a new output transfer

switch (located in battery board room 4) which charges batteries

4, 5, or 6 plant batteries. A meclianical interlocKpermits closing

only: one output feeaer at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery

board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock is used in battery board

room 4

TP-2 & TP-7

Attention to Detail

(

XI.

Summary

We have discussed in detail the DC Power Systems at BFN.

The electrical design and operation which makes these

systems so reliable has been explained. The various systems

have been described with reference to function, components,

locations, and electrical loads. Power sources have been

identified, and instrumentation has been noted. Significant

control and alarm aspects have also been pointed out.

OPL171.037

Revision 10

Page 31 of 70

250V Battery Charger

Normal Source

Alternate Source

(Charger Service bus)

1

480V SO Bd 1A, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

2A

480V SO Bd 2A Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

2B

480V SO Bd 2B, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

3

480V SO Bd 3A, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

4

480V SO Bd 3B, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

5

480V Com Bd 1 Comp 5C

(no alternate)

6

480V Com Bd 3 Comp 3D

(no alternate)

The 2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four feeders. Three DC outputs

can be connected to battery board 1, 2, or 3. The fourth DC output is connected to output

transfer switch (BBR 4) to batteries 4, 5, or 6. Mechanical interlock permits closing only one

output feeder at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock

is used in battery board room 4.)

250V DC battery chargers 1, 2A and 2B will load shed upon receipt of a Unit 1 or Unit 2

accident signal and any Unit 1/2 shutdown board being supplied by its respective diesel

generator or cross tied to a Unit 3 shutdown board and a unit three Diesel Generator. 250

VDC Battery Charger 3 will load shed on a unit 3 load shed signal.

e oad shedding feature

can be b~ssed by. placing the "Emergency" switCii on the charger. to tfie "EMERG" P.Qsition.

Station Battery charger 4 does not have load shed logic; however, battery charger 4 will

deenergize when 3B 480 SID Board deenergizes and will return when the 480V SID Board

voltage returns.

They also supply alternate control power for Units 1 and 2 4kV Shutdown Boards; however, on

Unit 3, the A, C, and 0 4kV Shutdown Boards receive both normal and alternate control power

from the 250V DC Unit Systems. (3EB receives alternate control power only.) The 250V DC

RMOV Boards are supplied from the Unit Battery Board as follows:

BB-1 supplies 250V RMOV Boards 1A, 2C, 3B.

BB-2 supplies 250V RMOV Bds 2A, 1C, 3C.

OPL171.037

Revision 10

Page 47 of70

(

-

=

=
=

..=.

-

-

-

480vSO BO 1A

NOR

............

BATTERY

CHARGER

No.1

ALT

............

480v SO B02A

............

BATTERY

CHARGER

No.2A

ALT

.............

480v SO BO 2B

NOR

............

BATTERY

~

CHARGER

en

No.2B

0:w

u..

ALT

enz

1************-

~I-

480v SO B03A

~

0..

I-

NOR

)

,.-------.---i

0

I

aJ

BATTERY

N

CHARGER

0

I-

No.3

ALT

............;

480v SO BO 3B

NOR

BATTERY

CHARGER t--------+-----+--+----i--+---;--i----+---+-____

NO.4

1-----' ALT

BATT

BO 1

BATT

B02

BATT

B03

BATT

B04

480v

COMMON

BO 1

..............._..

..................

TP-2

250V DC Power Distribution

(

(

22. RO 264000K5.06 00 l/C/A/T2Gl/82 - DG/9/264000K5.06//RO/SRO/

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 2 is operating at Full Power.

No Equipment is Out of Service.

A large leak occurs in the drywell and the following conditions exist:

- Drywell Pressure peaked at 28 psig and is currently at 20 psig.

- Reactor Pressure is at 110 psig.

- Reactor Water Level is at -120 inches

- Offsite power is available.

Which ONE of the following describes the proper loading sequence and associated equipment?

A. II 28 RHR and 28 Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.

B.

RHRSW pumps lined up for EECW start at 14 seconds after the accident signal is received.

c.

Core Spray pumps (2A, 28, 2C, 2D) start immediately when voltage is available on the respective

shutdown board.

D.

2C RHR and 2C Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.

KIA Statement:

264000 EDGs

K5.06 - Knowledge of the operational implications of the following concepts as they apply to

EMERGENCY GENERATORS (DIESEUJET): Load sequencing

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions and times to correctly determine the effect of.load sequencing on plant equipment

supplied by the Emergency Generators.

References:

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Load Sequencing is NVA (Normal Voltage Available) and NOT DGVA (DIG Voltage Available).

2. Based on Item 1 above, theproper load sequencing with a Common Accident Signal (CAS) on Unit-2

alone and NOT in addition to a CAS on Unit 1.

A is correct.

B is incorrect. This is plusible because RHRSW pumps all start at 14 seconds if load sequencing is

DGVA.

C is incorrect. This is plausible based on Load Sequencing logic prior to a modification for Unit 1 restart

activities.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because 2-01-74 P&L 3.2.B defines the start time as 7 second

"intervals".

(

(

b.

(2)

Opens diesel output breakers if shut.

If normal voltage is available, load will

sequence on as follows: (NVA)

OPL171.038

Revision 16

Page 38 of63

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

ou.v.s.s

ou.v.c.e

Obj.v.D.15

oejv.s. 15

Time After Accident

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

A

C

B

D

, 0-

RHR/GS-A_ l

7

RHR/CS B

14

RHR/CS C

21

RHR/CS D

28

RHRSW

RHRSW

RHRSW*

RHRSW

  • RHRSW pumps assigned for. EECW automatic start

c.

If

ormal voltage is NeT-available: (DGVA)

(1)

After 5-second time delay, all4kV

Shutdown Board loads except

4160/480V transformer breakers are

automatically tripped.

(2)

Diesel generator output breaker closes

when diesel is at speed.

ouv.e.s

ouv.c.e

c.

(3)

Loads sequence as indicated below

Time After Accident

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

A

B

C

D

0

RHR A

RHR C

RHR B

RHR D

7

CSA

CS C

CS B

CS D

14

RHRSW*

RHRSW*

RHRSW*

RHRSW*

  • RHRSW pumps assigned for EECW automatic start

d.

Certain 480V loads are shed whenever an

accident signal is received in conjunction with

the diesel generator tied to the board. (see

OPL171.072)

(

(

BFN

Residual Heat Removal System

2-01-74

Unit 2

Rev. 0133

Page 17 of 367

3.2

LPCI (continued)

B.

Upon an automatic LPCI initiation with normal power available, RFiR P-ump 2~

starts immeaiately. and 2B, 2C, 2D sequentially start at 7 second intervals.

Otherwise, all RHR pumps start immediately once diesel power is available

(and normal power unavailable).

C.

Manually stopping an RHR pump after LPCI initiation disables automatic restart

of that pump until the initiation signal is reset. The affected RHR pump can still

be started manually.

3.3

Shutdown Cooling

A.

Prior to initiating Shutdown Cooling, RHR should be flushed to Radwaste until

conductivity is less than 2.0 micromho/cm with less than 0.1 ppm chlorides

(unless directed otherwise by 2-AOI-74-1, Loss of Shutdown Cooling). If CS&S

has been aligned as the keep fill source for two days or more a chemistry

sample should be requested and results analyzed to determine if flushing is

required.

B.

When in Shutdown Cooling, reactor temperature should be maintained greater

than 72°F and only be controlled by throttling RHRSW flow. This is to assure

adequate mixing of reactor water.

1.

[NER/C] Reactor vessel water temperatures below 68°F exceed the

temperature reactivity assumed in the criticality analysis.

[INPO SER 90-017]

2.

[NER/C] Maintaining water temperature below 100°F minimizes the release of

soluble activity.

[GE SIL 541]

C.

Shutdown Cooling operation at saturated conditions (212°F) with 2 RHR pumps

operating at or near combined maximum flow (20,000 gpm) could cause Jet

Pump Cavitation. Indications of Jet Pump Cavitation are as follows:

1.

Rise in RHR System flow without a corresponding rise in Jet Pump flow.

2.

Fluctuation of Jet Pump flow.

3.

Louder "Rumbling" noise heard when vessel head is off.

Corrective action for any of these symptoms would be to reduce RHR flow until

the symptom is corrected.

(

23. RO 300000K2.02 001/MEM/T2Gl/CAI1300000K2.02/2.8/2.8/RO/SR0/1l/16/07 RMS

Which ONE of the follow ing describes the power supplies to the Control and Service Air Compressor

motors?

A.

"A" and "8" are fed from the 480V Common 8d. #1

"C" and "0" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28 , respectively

"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480 SO 8d. 2A

"E" from the 480V Common 8d. #1

B.

"A" and "0" from 480V Common 8d . 1

"8" and "C" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28, respectively

"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A

"F" from 480V Common 8d. #3

C.

"A" from 480V SID 8d. 18

"8" and "F" from 480V Common 8d. #3

"C" from 480V SID 8d. 1A

"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A

"G" from 4KV Common 8d.#2

0. 01 "A" from 480V SID 8d. 18

"8" and "C" from 480V Common 8d . #1

"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A

"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A

"E" from 480V Common 8d. #3

KJA Statement:

300000 Instrument Air

.

K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Emergency air compressor

KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of the power supplies of ALL air compressors.

References:

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Power supplies to six air compressors.

NOTE: Regarding plausibility, all the power supplies listed in the distractors are capable of supplying

power to each air compressor.

A is incorrect. B, G & E are correct. A, C & D are incorrect.

B is incorrect. F & G are correct. A, B, C, & D are incorrect.

C is incorrect. A, D & F are correct. B, C &G are incorrect

D is correct.

(

(

X. Lesson Body

A. Control Air System

1. **The purpose of the Control Air System is to process

and distribute oil-free control air, dried to a low dew point

and free of foreign materials. This high-quality air is

required throughout the plant and yard to ensure the

proper functioning of pneumatically operated

instruments, valves, and final operators.

2. Basic Description of Flow Path

a. The station control air system has 5 air compressors,

each designed for continuous operation.

b. Common header (fed by air compressors A-D and G)

(1) The control air system is normally aligned with the

G air compressor running and loaded. The

existing A-D air compressors are aligned with one

in second lead , one in third lead, and at least one

compressor in standby.

(2) 3 control air receivers

(3) 4 dual dryers One for each unit's control air

header (units 1, 2 & 3 through their 4-inch

headers) and One standby dryer supplies the

standby, 3- inch common control air header for all

three units

(4) Outlet from large service air receiver is connected

to the control air receivers through a pressure

control valve 0-FCV-33-1, which will automatically

open to supply service air to the control air

header if control air pressure falls to 85 psig.

c. 4-inch control air header (1 per unit) is supplied from

each unit dryer and backed up by a common, 3-inch

standby header.

3. Control Air System Component Description

a. Four Reciprocating Air Compressors A-D (2-stage,

double acting, V-type) are located EI 565, U-1

Turbine Building.

(1) Supply air to the control air receivers at 610 scfm

each at a normal operating pressure of 90 - 101

psig.

(2) 480V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, drive motors

(3) Power supplies

A from 480V Shutdown Board 1B

OPL171.054

Revision 12

Page 9 of 72

Obj. V.E.1

TP-1

Obj. V.E.3

Obj. V.D.1

The G air compressor

will be discussed later in

this section of the lesson

plan.

normally aligned to all

three units

TP-1

(

o from 480V Shutdown Board 2A

B from 480V Common Board 1

C from 480V Common Board 1

(a) Control air compressors which are powered

from the 480 VAC shutdown boards are

tripped automatically due to:

i.

under voltage on the shutdown board.

ii.

load shed logic during an accident signal

concurrent with a loss of offsite power.

NOTE: The compressors must be

restarted manually after power is restored

to the board.

(b) Units powered from common boards also trip

due to under voltage.

(4) Lubrication provided from attached oil system via

gear-type oil pump

(a) Compressor trips on

lube oil pressure < 10 psig

or

lube oil temperature >180 of

(b) Compressor cylinder is a non lubricated type

(5) Cooling water is from the Raw Cooling Water

system with backup from EECW

(a) Compressor oil cooler, compressor inter-

cooler, after cooler and cylinder water jackets

(b) Compressor inter-cooler and after cooler

moisture traps drain moisture to the Unit 1

station sump .

NOTE: Cooling water flows to the compressors are regulated

such that the RCW outlet temperature is maintained

between 70° F and 100° F. Outlet temperatures

should be adjusted low in the band (high flow rates)

during warm seasons (river temps. ~ 70°F). Outlet

temperatures should be adjusted high in the band

during the cooler seasons (river temps ~ 70°F) to

reduce condensation in the cylinders.

(c) Compressor auto trips if discharge

temperature of air> 310° F.

b. Unloaders

OPL171 .054

Revision 12

Page 10 of 72

Obj. V.B.1.

Obj. V.C.1.

Obj. V.B.2.

Obj. V.C.2.

Obj. V.E.12

Obj. V.D.10

Obj. V.B.2.

Obj. V.C.2.

Obj. V.E.12

Obj. V.D .10

(

(b) Should both the primary and the backup

controllers fail, all four compressors will come

on line at full load until these pressure

switches cause the compressors to unload at

112 psig.

(c) When air pressure drops below the high

pressure cutoff setpoint (110.8 psig), the

compressors will again come on line at full

load until the high pressure cutoff switches

cause the compressors to unload.

d. Relief valves on the compressors discharge set at

120 psig protects the compressor and piping.

e. G Air Compressor - centrifugal type, two stage

(1) Located 565' EL Turbine Bldg. , Unit 1 end.

Control Air Compressor G is the primary control

air compressor and provides most of the control

air needed for normal plant operation.

(2) Rated at 1440 SCFM @ 105 psig.

(3) Power Supply

(a) 4 kV Shutdown Board B supplies power to

the compressor motor.

(b) 480 V RMOV Bd. 2A Supplies the following :

Pre lube pump

Oil reservoir heater

Cooling water pumps

Panel(s) control power

Auto Restart circuit

(c) Except for short power interruptions on the

480v RMOV Bd, Loss of either of these two

power supplies will result in a shutdown of the

G air compressor.

(4) A complete description of the G Air compressor

controls and indications can be found in 0-01-32.

(The G and the F air compressor indications and

Microcontrollers are similar).

(a) UNLOAD MODULATE AUTO DUAL

handswitch is used to select the mode of

operation for the compressor

OPL171.054

Revision 12

Page 14 of 72

Cutout switch setpoints

are set at 112 psig to

prevent spurious

operation when G air

compressor running

Cover 01 illustrations

TP-8

3. Component Description

a. Compressors E and F (EL 565, U-3 Turbine Building)

are designated for service air.

b. The F air compressor is rated for approximately 630

SCFM @ 105 psig, centrifugal type, 2 stages

c. The power supply for both compressors is 480VAC

Common Board 3.

d. FIG air compressor comparison

(1) Controls are similar to that of the G air

compressor. There is no 4KV breaker control on

the F air compressor control panel.

(2) Control system modulates discharge air pressure

in the same manner as is done on the G air

compressor.

(3) Air system is similar to the G air compressor. A

difference is that the 2 stages of compression are

driven by one shaft for the F air compressor. On

the G air compressor, there is a separate drives;

one for each of 3 compression stages.

(4) Oil system similar to that on the G air compressor

with exception of location of components and

capacity. E compressor has an electric oil pump

that runs whenever control power is on.

(5) Cooling system is similar to that on the G air

compressor with exception of flow rate, location,

and capacity of components.

(6) Loss of power will result in F air compressor trip,

loss of the pre lube pump, and the cooling water

pumps .

(7) Restart of the compressor can be accomplished

once the compressor has come to a full stop and

any trip conditions cleared and reset.

e. AlarmslTrips

(1) The Alert and Shutdown setpoints for the Fair

compressor are listed in 0-01-33.

OPL171.054

Revision 12

Page 30 of 72

Obj. V.E.6

Obj. V.DA

TP-16

ouv.s.r

Obj. V.D.5

Set to control at approx.

95 psig - Relief Valve is

set to lift at.~ 115 psig.

TP-17

TP-18

TP-19

See for latest setpoints

(

24. RO 300000K3.01 00 lIelA/T2G lISGT/B 1OB/300000K3.0113.2/3A/RO/SRO/l l/l 6/07 RMS

A LOCA has occurred on Unit 1 and the drywell is being vented to SBGT, when a loss of the Control Air

system occurs.

Which ONE of the following describes the operation of vent valves 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD

ISOL VALVE and 1-FCV-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT?

A.

Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will fail close and can not be operated .

8.

Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line

with no operator action required.

C.oI Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line,

however CAD supply must be manually aligned from the control room.

D.

The CAD system must be manually initiated and then vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 may

be realigned to the CAD supply.

KIA Statement:

300000 Instrument Air

K3.01 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the

(INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM) will have

on the following: Containment air system

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the effect on the containment air system due to a loss of Control Air.

References: 1-EOI Appendicies 8G and 12, 1-AOI-32-2

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. Whether the vent valves automatically swap to be supplied by CAD or must be manually aligned.

2. Whether CAD supply to DW Control Air automatically swaps or must be manually aligned.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves DO fail closed, however, they can be operated

with manual alignment of the CAD Tanks.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves will auto swap to control from the CAD supply

line, however the CAD tanks must be manually aligned.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible becase the CAD system must be manually initiated, however once this is

accomplished, no further alignment is necessary.

(

BFN

1*EOI APPENDIX*12

UNIT 1

PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING

Rev. 0

Page 4 ofa

f.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating

approximately 100 scfm.

g.

CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.

10.

VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, as

follows:

a.

VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141 , DRYWELL DP COMP

BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).

b.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT

ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).

c.

VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL

VALVE (Panel 1-9-54).

d.

PLACE 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO

with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).

e.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-19, 1-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in

OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).

f.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating

approximately 100 scfm.

g.

CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.

11.

VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as

follows:

a.

VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP

BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).

b.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR I DWVENT

ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).

c.

VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBD ISOL VALVE

(Panel 1-9-54).

d.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO

with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).

e.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-20, 1-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION

BYPASS, in BYPASS (Panel 1-9-55).

f.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating

approximately 100 scfm.

(

1-EOI APPENDIX-12

Rev. 0

BFN

PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING

Page 7 of 8

UNIT 1

AITACHMENT 1

...J

...J

~o

3:

0

ws

en

2"

It:

I-

W

o

&,

64-34

>

en

.....

0

0

~

~

I-

c>>

A-

N

N

E

....

0

'?

W

eo

-e

.....

eo

en>-

-

en

I

.....z

I

w>

'---

~

'"

0

0

'"

'?

0

....

-e

eo

eo

9£-\\79

~

en

we::

ClW

e::~i

~-

Q.u.

...Jo

o

...JZ

o

w<

0

~en

gz

...J en

>-z

alO

al z

e::<

e::i=1-

e::<

Ou.

Ou.

o~en

1-1-

I

I-_~

tl en

tll-<

i5~

i5 Z J:

wx

e::~ <;

e::>w

ox

I-W

(

BFN

CROSSTIE CAD TO

1-EOI APPENDIX-8G

UNIT 1

DRYWELL CONTROL AIR

Rev. 0

Page 1 of 2

LOCATION:

Unit 1 Control Room

ATTACHMENTS:

None

1.

OPEN the following valves:

0-FCV-84-5, CAD A TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE

(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-54)

0-FCV-84-16, CAD B TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE

(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-55).

2.

VERIFY 0-PI-84-6, VAPOR A OUTLET PRESS, and 0-PI-84-17,

VAPOR B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100 psig

Panel 1-9-54 and Panel 1-9-55).

3.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW

CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-54).

4.

CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL

AIR, (Panel 1-9-54).

5.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW

CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).

6.

CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL

AIR (Panel 1-9-55).

7.

CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,

1-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18).

8.

IF

MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,

1-PA-32-31, annunciator is or remains in alarm

(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18),

THEN

DETERMINE which Drywell Control Air header is

depressurized as follows:

a.

DISPATCH personnel to Unit 1, RB, EI 565 ft, to MONITOR the

following indications for low pressure:

1-PI-084-0051, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS

indicator, for CAD A (RB, EI. 565, by Drywell Access

Door),

1-PI-084-0050, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS

indicator, for CAD B (RB, EI. 565, left side of 480V RB

Vent Board 1B).

(~

(

BFN

Loss Of Control Air

1-AOI-32-2

Unit 1

Rev. 0001

Page 5 of 27

2.0

SYMPTOMS (continued)

REACTOR CHANNEL A(B) AUTO SCRAM annunciator, (1-XA-55-5B,

Window 1(2)) in alarm.

MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW annunciator,

(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18) in alarm.

3.0

AUTOMATIC ACTIONS

A.

U-1 TO U-2 CONT AIR CROSSTIE, 1-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE to separate

Units 1 & 2 when control Air Header Control Air Header pressure reaches

65 psig lowering at the valve.

B.

UNIT 2 TO UNIT 3 CONTROL AIR CROSSTIE, 2-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE

to separate Units 2 and 3 when Control Air Header pressure reaches 65 psig

lowering at the valve.

C.

CAD SUPPLY PRESS REGULATOR, 1-PCV-084-0706, will select nitrogen

from CAD Tank A at s 75 psig Control Air pressure to supply the following:

1.

SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0020

2.

SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0021

D.

INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0033, will select nitrogen from CAD

Tank A to supply the following:

1.

DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,

1-FSV-084-0019

2.

DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0029

3.

SUPPR CHMBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0032

E.

INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0034, will select nitrogen from CAD

Tank B to supply the following:

1.

DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,

1-FSV-084-0020

2.

DRYWELL INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0031

3.

SUPPR CHBR INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0034.

(

BFN

Loss Of Control Air

1-AOI-32-2

Unit 1

Rev. 0001

Page 7 of 27

4.2

Subsequent Actions (continued)

NOTE

CNDS BSTR PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1C, 1-FCV-002-0029A and CNDS BSTR

PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1B, 1-FCV-002-0029B both fail CLOSED on a loss of

control air.

[3]

IF there is NOT a flow path for Condensate system, THEN

STOP the Condensate Pumps and Condensate Booster

Pumps. REFER TO 1-01-2.

[4]

IF any Outboard MSIV closes, THEN

PLACE the associated handswitch on Panel 1-9-3 in the

CLOSE position.

NOTE

RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION, 0-FCV-25-32, fails CLOSED on loss of control air.

o

o

[5]

START a High Pressure Fire Pump. REFER TO 0-01-26.

0

[6]

OPEN CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-5, at

Panel 1-9-54.

0

[7]

OPEN CAD SYSTEM B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-16,

at Panel 1-9-55.

0

[8]

CHECK RCW pump motor amps and PERFORM Steps

4.2[8.1] through 4.2[8.5]to reduce RCW flow:

(

25. RO 400000A2.02 OO l/C/A/T2G I/RBCCW//400000A2 .02/3.8/4.I/RO/SRO/ll/l6/07 RMS

With Unit 2 operating at power, the following changes are observed:

- RBCCW Temperature lower than normal.

- Annunciator 2-XA-55-4C-6 RBCCW Surge Tank High Level is in alarm.

Which ONE of the following describes a cause for these indications and the corrective action required?

A.

Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak into RBCCW. Trip and isolate the Recirculation Pump.

B.oI

RCW leak in the RBCCW heat exchanger(s). Remove RBCCW from service following unit

shutdown.

C.

RWCU leak into RBCCW via non-regenerative heat exchanger. Isolate RWCU.

D.

Drywell equipment drain sump heat exchanger leak into RBCCW. Isolate DW Equipment Drain

Sump heat exchanger.

KIA Statement:

400000 Component Cooling Water

A2.02 - Ability to (a) predict the impacts of the following on the CCWS and (b) based on those

predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those abnormal

operation: High/low surge tank level

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the effect of a leak into the RBCCW system and determine which procedure

addresses this condition .

References:

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Which leak path would provide the indications given in the question stem.

2. What actions would be required to mitigate the problem .

NOTE: All distractors are plausible leak paths into RBCCW but would indicate higher temperatures.

A is incorrect. A Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.

B is Correct.

C is incorrect. A RWCU leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.

D is incorrect. A DW Equipment Drain Sump HX leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.

(

BFN

Unit 1

RBCCW

SURGE TANK

LEVEL HIGH

1-LA-70-2A

(Page 1 of 2)

Panel 9-4

1-XA-55-4C

SensorlTrip Point:

1-LS-070-0002A

1-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0015

Page 12 of 43

4 Inches Above Center Line of Tank

c.

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Operator

Action:

RBCCW surge tank on the fourth floor in the M-G set room .

A.

Makeup valve 1-FCV-70-1 open.

B. Bypass valve 1-2-1369 leaking.

<'S. Leak into the system.

None

A. VERIFY make-up valve 1-FCV-70-1 closed, using RBCCW SYS

SURGE TANK FILL VALVE, 1-HS-70-1 , on Panel 1-9-4.

B. CHECK RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP, 1-TIS-70-3,

indicates water temperature is 100°F or less, on Panel 1-9-4.

C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level, ensure bypass valve,

1-2-1369, is closed and observe sight glass level.

D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 1-70-609, then CLOSE valve when

desired level is obtained.

E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma

activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.

F.

CHECK activity reading on RM-90-131D.

Continued on Next Page

o

o

o

o

o

o

(

BFN

Unit 1

Panel 9-4

1-XA-55-4C

1-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0015

Page 13 of 43

RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A, Window 6

(Page 2 of 2)

Operator

Action:

(Continued)

NOTE

[NERlC] Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 1-RM-90-131

(Panel 1-9-10) activity (1-RR-90-131/132 Panel 1-9-2) or 1-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature

(Panel 1-9-21) or lowering of any Recirc pump seal pressure.

G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is

leaking, THEN

PERFORM the following:

DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and at

the discretion of the Unit Supervisor, ISOLATE. REFER TO

1-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable. COOLDOWN is

required to prevent hanger or shock suppressors from exceeding

their maximum travel range.

0

WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig and at the

discretion of the Unit Supervisor, THEN

ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the

RBCCW PIPING.[IEN 89-054, GE SIL-459)

0

H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source, if present.

0

(

References:

1-45E620-4

1-47E610-70-1

FSAR Section 10.6.4 and 13.6.2

26. RO 400000G2.4.31 00 lICfA/T2G1IRBCCWff4000002.4.3Of/ROfSRO/NO

Unit 3 is at 100% rated power with the following indications :

RECIRC PUMP MTR B TEMP HIGH (3-ARP-9-4B W13) in alarm.

RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W17) in alarm.

RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH (3-ARP-9-4C W6) in alarm.

RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W22) in alarm.

RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP recorder 3-TR-68-84 is reading 170 of and

rising.

RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP 3-TIS-70-3 is reading 140 of and rising.

RWCU NON-REGENERATIVE HX DISCH TEMP HIGH in alarm.

AREA RADIATION MONITOR RE-90-13 and RE-90-14 are in alarm reading 55 mrlhr and rising.

Which ONE of the following describes the action(s) that should be taken?

REFERENCE PROVIDED

A. 01

Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Commence a

normal shutdown and cooldown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .

B.

Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Enter 3-EOI-1,

RPV Control at Step RC-1.

C.

Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system. Close RBCCW Sectionalizing Valve 3-FCV-70-48

to isolate non-essential loads and maximize cooling to 3B Recirc. Pump. EOI entry is not required.

D.

Enter 3-EOI-3 , Secondary Containment Control. Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system.

Commence a normal shutdown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .

KIA Statement:

400000 Component Cooling Water

2.4.31 - Emergency Procedures I Plan Knowledge of annunciators alarms and indications, and use of the

response instructions.

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the corrective actions required due to an emergency involving RBCCW

based on annunciators and indications.

References:

3-EOI-3 flowchart, 3-ARP 9-3 and 3-ARP-9-4

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

(

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: 3-EOI-3 flowchart

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. EOI Entry is required solely based on ARM alarms.

2. Location of the leak is from the 3B Recic Pump.

3. RWCU temperature indications are due to insufficient cooling by RBCCW, not a RWCU leak.

4. Appropriate actions per 3-EOI-3 are to isolate the leak and monitor radiation levels.

5. Justification for Unit Shudwon and Cooldown are due to the Recirc Loop being isolated at rated

temperature and pressure (pipe hanger and support issue), and NOT Directed by 3-EOI-3.

A is correct.

B is incorrect. Entering 3-EOI-1 to initiate a scram is NOT required until radiation levels approach 1000

mr/hr in any area. This is plausible becuase the location of the leak and required isolation are correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the

temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. If RWCU was the leak location, the

RBCCW temperature would not be high enough to provide the given indications. The leak would have to

have occurred in the NRHX which is below the indicated RBCCW temperature.

D is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the

temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. In addition to the justification above,

commencing a shutdown in accordance with 3-EOI-3 is not appropriate until ARMs indicate greater than

1000 mr/hr.

(

(

OPL171.047

Revision 12

Appendix C

Page 35 of 41

DEMIN

WATER ----.,r-I~>l<lh

MAKEUP

DRW

.................. ................

RCW

t-_........U2

TCV'S

RCW

.""",,~n TCV'S

RCW

  • ,II1II""**"" TCV'S

RCW

I&lfiI~~**~~f:J---+-"OUTLET

626

623

0-70-607

601

U2-11.....-1

RBCCW

RETURN",--====-__J

HEADER

CHEMICAL

FEED

633

RBCCW

SUPPLY

HEADER

70

69

638

U3

67

68

'--........ U3

U2

TP-1: RBCCW SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM

(

8FN

Unit 3

Panel 9-4

3-XA-55-48

3-ARP-9-48

Rev. 0036

Page 17 of 45

RECIRC

PUMP MTR B

TEMP HIGH

3-TA-68-84

(Page 1 of 1)

SensorlTrip Point:

Alarm is from 3-TR-68-84, Panel 3-9-2

3-TE-68-73A RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG UPPER FACE (190°F)

3-TE-68-73C RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG LOWER FACE (190°F)

3-TE-68-73E RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-UPPER GUIDE BRG (190°F)

3-TE-68-73N RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-LOWER GUIDE BRG (190°F)

3-TE-68-73G RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING A (216°F)

3-TE-68-73J RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING B (216°F)

3-TE-68-73L RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING C (216°F)

3-TE-68-73T RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.2 CAVITY(180°F)

3-TE-68-73U RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.1 CAVITY(180°F)

3-TE-68-67 RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG (140°F)

3-TE-68-70 RECIRC PMPMTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM BRG (140°F)

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Temperature elements are located on recirculation pump motor, Elevation 563.12,

Unit 3 drywell.

A. Possible bearing failure.

B. Possible motor overload.

C. Insufficient cooling water.

D. Possible seal failure.

E. High drywell temperature.

None

Operator

Action:

A. . CHECK following on Panel 3-9-4:

RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP temperature indicating

switch, 3-TIS-70-3 normal (summer 70-95°F, winter 60-80°F).

RBCCW PRI CTMT OUTLET handswitch, 3-HS-70-47A

(3-FCV-70-47) OPEN.

o

o

o

B. CHECK the temperature of the cooling water leaving the seal and

bearing coolers < 140°F on RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND

BRG TEMP temperature recorder, 3-TR-68-84 on Panel 3-9-21.

0

C. LOWER recire pump speed until Bearing and/or Winding

temperatures are below the alarm setpoint.

0

D. CONTACT Site Engineering to PERFORM a complete assessment

and monitoring of all seal conditions particularly seal leakage,

temperature, and pressure of all stages for Recirc Pump seal

temperatures in excess of 180°F.

0

References:

3-45E620-5

GE 731E320RE

3-47E610-68-1

3-SIMI-68B

Tech Spec 3.4.1

FSAR Section 13.6.2

(

BFN

Unit3

RBCCW EFFLUENT

RADIATION

HIGH

3-RA-90-131 A

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

SensorlTrip Point:

RE-90-131D

ill

(NOTE 2)

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 25 of 51

HI-HI

(NOTE 2)

(Page 1 of 2)

Hi alarm from recorder

Hi-Hi alarm from drawer

(2)

Chemlab should be contacted for current setpoints per 0-TI-45.

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

RE-90-131A RBCCW HX Rx Bldg, EI593, R-20 S-L1NE

HX tube leak into RBCCW system.

None

Operator

Action:

A.

DETERMINE cause of alarm by observing following:

1.

RBCCWand RCW EFFLUENT RADIATION recorder,

3-RR-90-131/132 Red pen on Panel 3-9-2.

2.

RBCCW EFFLUENT OFFLINE RAD MON, 3-RM-90-131D on

Panel 3-9-10.

o

o

B. NOTIFY Chemistry to sample RBCCW for total gamma activity to

verify condition.

0

C. START an immediate investigation to determine if source of leak is

RWCU Non-regenerative, Fuel Pool Cooling, Reactor Water Sample

or RWCU Recirc Pump 3A or 3B Seal Water heat exchanger(s).

0

D.

(NERlC] CHECK Following for indication of Reactor Recirculation

Pump Seal Heat Exchanger leak:

1.

LOWERING in reactor Recirculation pump 3A(3B) NO.1 or 2

SEAL, 3-PI-68-64A or 3-PI-68-63A (3-PI-68-76A or 3-PI-68-75A)

on Panel 3-9-4.

0

2.

Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-54, on

RECIRC PMP MTR 3A WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature

recorder, 3-TR-68-58, on Panel 3-9-21.

0

3.

Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-67, on

RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature

recorder, 3-TR-68-84, on Panel 3-9-21.

0

Continued on Next Page

(

BFN

Unit 3

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 26 of 51

RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-131A, Window 17

(Page 2 of 2)

Operator

Action: (Continued)

E. IF it is determ ined the source of leakage is from Reactor Recirc

Pump A(B), THEN

1.

ISOLATE Reactor Recirculation Loop A(B) per 3-01-68, as

applicable.

0

NOTE

Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors from exceeding their maximum travel

range.

2.

WHEN primary system pressure is less than 125 psig, THEN

ISOLATE RBCCW System to preclude damage to RBCCW

piping.

[lEN 89-054 , GE SIL-459)

0

References:

3-45E620-3

3-47E610-90-3

GE 3-729E814-3

BFN

Unit3

RX BLDG AREA

RADIATION

HIGH

3-RA-90-1D

(Page 1 of 2)

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

SensorlTrip Point:

RI-90-4A

RI-90-8A

RI-90-9A

RI-90-13A

RI-90-14A

RI-90-20A

RI-90-21A

RI-90-22A

RI-90-23A

RI-90-24A

RI-90-25A

RI-90-26A

RI-90-27A

RI-90-28A

RI-90-29A

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 32 of 51

For setpoints REFER TO

3-SIMI-90B.

Sensor

RE-90-4

MG set area

Rx Bldg EI. 639

R-17 Q-L1NE

Location:

RE-90-8

Main Control Room

Rx Bldg EI. 617

R-16 R-L1NE

RE-90-9

Clean-up System

Rx Bldg EI. 621

R-16 T-L1NE

RE-90-13

North Clean-up Sys.

Rx Bldg EI. 593

R-16 P-L1NE

RE-90-14

South Clean-up Sys.

Rx Bldg EI. 593

R-16 S-L1NE

RE-90-20

CRD-HCU West

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-16 R-L1NE

RE-90-21

CRD-HCU East

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-20 R-L1NE

RE-90-22

Tip Room

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-19 P-L1NE

RE-90-23

Tip Drive

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-19 P-L1NE

RE-90-24

HPCI Room*

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-21 U-L1NE

RE-90-25

RHR West

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-16 U-L1NE

RE-90-26

Core Spray-RCIC

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-16 N-L1NE

RE-90-27

Core Spray

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-20 N-L1NE

RE-90-28

RHR East

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-20 U-L1NE

RE-90-29

Suppression Pool .

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-19 U-L1NE

Due to the location of the Rad Monitor in relation to the Test line in the HPCI

Quad, the HPCI Room Rad Alarm may be received when the HPCI Flow test

is in progress.

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Radiation levels have risen above alarm set point. HPCI Flow Rate Surveillance in

Progress.

None

Continued on Next Page

(

BFN

Unit3

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036 *

Page 33 of 51

Operator

Action:

RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D, Window 22

(Page 2 of 2)

A. DETERMINE area with high radiation level on Panel 3-9-11. (Alarm

on Panel 3-9-11 will automatically reset if radiation level lowers

below setpoint.)

B. IF the alarm is from the HPCI Room while Flow testing is being

performed, THEN

REQUEST personnel at the HPCI Quad to validate conditions.

C. NOTIFY RADCON.

D. IF the TSC is NOT manned and a "VALID" radiological condition

exists., THEN

USE public address system to evacuate area where high airborne

conditions exist

E. IF the TSC is manned and a "VALID" radiological condition exists,

THEN

REQUEST the TSC to evacuate non-essential personnel from

affected areas.

F.

MONITOR other parameters providing input to this annunciator

frequently as these parameters will be masked from alarming while

this alarm is sealed in.

G. IF a CREV initiation is received, THEN

1.

VERIFY CREV A(B) Flow is ~ 2700 CFM, and ~ 3300 CFM as

indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) within 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> of the CREV

initiation. [BFPER 03-017922]

2.

IF CREV A(B) Flow is NOT ~ 2700 CFM, and s 3300 CFM as

indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) THEN

PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)

[BFPER 03-017922]

a.

STOP the operating CREV per 0-01-31.

b.

START the standby CREV per 0-01-31.

H. IF alarm is due to malfunction, THEN

REFER TO 0-01-55.

I.

ENTER 3-EOI-3 Flowchart.

J.

REFER TO 3-AOI-79-1 or 3-A01-79-2 if applicable.

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

References:

3-45E620-3

3-45E610-90-1

GE 730E356-1

(

BFN

Unit 3

RBCCW

SURGE TANK

LEVEL HIGH

3-LA-70-2A

(Page 1 of 2)

Panel 9-4

3-XA-55-4C

SensorlTrip Point:

3-LS-070-0002A

3-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0028

Page 12 of 44

4 inches above center line of tank

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Operator

Action:

RBCCW surge tank in the MG set room EI 639'.

A. Makeup valve, 3-FCV-70-1, open.

B. Bypass valve 3-BYV-002-1369 leaking.

C. Leak into the system.

None

A. CHECK make-up valve 3-FCV-70-1, 3-HS-70-1, CLOSED on

Panel 3-9-4.

B. CHECK RBCCW system water leaving the RBCCW system heat

exchangers is 100°F or less on 3-TI-70-3, Panel 3-9-4.

C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level and to ensure

3-BYV-002-1369, FCV-70-1 BYPASS VALVE is CLOSED.

OBSERVE sight glass level.

D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 3-DRV-070-0609. CLOSE valve

when desired level is obtained.

E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma

activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.

F. CHECK activity reading on 3-RM-90-131 Band 3-RM-90-131 D.

Continued on Next Page

o

n

o

o

oo

(

BFN

Unit 3

Panel 9-4

3-XA-55-4C

3-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0028

Page 13 of 44

RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 3-LA-70-2A, Window 6

(Page 2"of 2)

Operator

Action: (Continued)

NOTE

[NER/C) Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 3-RM-90-131

(Panel 3-9-10) activity (3-RR-90-131 /132, Panel 3-9-2 or 3-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature,

Panel 3-9-21) or a lowering in any Recirc pump seal pressure.

G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is

leaking, THEN

PERFORM the following:

DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and

ISOLATE. REFER TO 3-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable.

Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors

from exceeding their maximum travel range.

0

WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig, THEN

ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the

RBCCW piping.

[IEN89-054, GE SIL-459)

0

H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source , if present.

References:

3-45N620-4

3-47E610-70-1

FSAR Sections 10.6.4 and 13.6.2

3-47E822-1

(

EOI - 3

OPL171.034

Revision 11

Appendix C

Page 30 of 30

TABLE 4

SECONDARY CONTAINMENT AREA RADIATION

APPLICABLE

MAX NORMAL

MAX SAFE

POTENTIAL

AREA

RADIATION

VALUE

VALUE

ISOLATION

INDICATORS

MRIHR

MR/HR

SOURCES

RHR SYS I PUMPS90-25A

ALARMED

1000

FCV-74-47, 48

RHR SYS II PUMPS

90-2BA

ALARMED

1000

FCV-74-47,48

HPCI ROOM

90-24A

A LARMED

1000

FCV -73 -2, 3, 81

FCV-73-44

CS SYS I PUMPS90-26A

ALARMED

1000

RCIC ROOM

FCV-71 -2, 3, 39

CS SYS II PUMPS90-27A

ALAR MED

1000

NO'l E

TORUS

FCV-73 -2, 3, 81

90-29A

ALAR MED

1000

FCV-74 -47, 48

GENERAL AREA

FCV-71 -2, 3

RB EL 565 W

90-20A

ALARMED

1000

FCV-69-1, 2, 12

SDV VENTS & DRAI NS

RB EL 565 E

90-21A

ALARMED

1000

SDV VENTS & DRAINS

RB EL 565 NE

90-23A

ALARM ED

1000

NO'l E

TIP ROOM

90-22A

ALAR MED

100 ,000

TI P BAL L VALVE

RB EL 593

90-13A, 14A

A LARMED

1000

FCV-74 -47 ,48

RB EL 621

90-9A

ALARMED

1000

FCV-43-13, 14

RECIRC MG SETS

90-4A

ALARMED

1000

NO'lE

REFUEL FLOOR

90-1A, 2A, 3A

ALARMED

1000

NO'lE

TP -7 EOI-3 TABLE 4

E

MINATION

REFERENCE

.PROVIDED TO

CANDIDATE

(

~-oau

C")*-ow

~

il,H-t1UIIrrrn

I

SlH"ttrr-r<lI I I I

~

1!l1 !!

!!

I

-! I

  • i ,I: .

iiiI III! iii!

II 1 II

I

orII

I iI iiiI 1111 I

I

r

It ..

I I I!!

I I I'"III!

I' IIi I I I

I

I

C")*-ow

(

27. RO 201003K3.03 OOl/MEM/TIG2/85-3/Bl1/201003K3.03/3.6/3.7/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS

Given the following plant conditions:

AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure, directs a manual scram based on low reactor pressure.

Which ONE of the following PROCEDURAL reactor pressure limits should be adhered to in this case and

WHY?

A.

980 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due

to the loss of accumulators.

B.oI

900 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due

to the loss of accumulators.

C.

445 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure required to lift a control rod

blade.

D.

800 psig reactor pressure, because this is the Technical Specification pressure for scramming

control rods for scram time testing .

KIA Statement:

201003 Control Rod and Drive Mechanism

K3.03 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the CONTROL ROD AND DRIVE

MECHANISM will have on following : Shutdown margin

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of CRD mechanism limitations and the basis for that limitation related to the ability to effect

and maintain shutdown margin.

References:

1/2/3-AOI-85-3, OPL 171.005, OPL171.006

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. The minimum pressure allowed by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.

2. The basis for that minimum pressure.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because 980 psig is the setpoint for the Low Accumulator Pressure

alarm.

B is correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure

specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure

specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.

OPL171.006

Revision 9

Page 17 of 60

C

(a)

A specific pattern of control rod

withdrawal or insertion

(b)

Written step-by-step path used by

the operator in establishing the

expected rod pattern and flux

shape at rated power

(c)

Deviation from the established

path could result in potentially

high control rod worths

(9) Shutdown margin

OBJ. V.B.15.c

(a)

Technical specifications of the

plant require knowing whether the

plant can be shutdown to a safe

level

(b)

Without the insertion capability of

Obj. V.B.20.g

all control rods, shutdown margin

will not be as great, thus closer to

an inadvertent criticality

(10)

Control Rod Worth variables

(a)

Moderator temperature

OBJ. V.8.20.e

i.

As temperature rises,

SER 3-05

slowing down length and

thermal diffusion length

increase

ii.

Rod worth increases with

as moderator temperature

increases

(b)

Void effects on rod worth

i.

As voids increase, average

neutron flux energy

increases

ii.

U238 and Pu240 will

(

capture more epithermal

neutrons through

resonance

(

BFN

CRD System Failure

1-AOI-85-3

Unit 1

Rev. 0003

Page 7 of 11

4.1

Immediate Actions (continued)

[2]

IF operating CRD PUMP has tripped AND backup CRD PUMP

is NOT available, THEN (Otherwise N/A)

PERFORM the following at Panel 1-9-5:

[2.1 ]

PLACE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11 ,

in MAN at minimum setting.

D

[2.2]

ATTEMPT TO RESTART tripped CRD Pump using one

of the following:

CRD PUMP 1B, using 1-HS-85-2A

CRD Pump 1A, using 1-HS-85-1A

D

[2.3]

ADJUST CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,

1-FIC-85-11, to establish the following conditions:

CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 1-PDI-85-18A,

approximately 20 psid.

D

CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11,

between 40 and 65 gpm.

D

[2.4]

BALANCE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,

1-FIC-85-11 , and PLACE in AUTO or BALANCE.

D

[3]

IF Reactor Pressure is less than 900 psig AND either of the

following conditions exists:

In-service CRD Pump tripped and neither CRD Pump can

be started , OR

Charging Water Pressure can NOT be restored and

maintained above 940 psig, THEN

PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)

[3.1]

[3.2]

MANUALLY SCRAM Reactor and IMMEDIATELY

PLACE the Reactor Mode Switch in the SHUTDOWN

position.

REFER TO 1-AOI-100-1. [Item 020]

D

D

OPL 171.006

Revision 9

Page 30 of 60

(

(6)

The withdraw motion is terminated prior

to reaching the desired position and the

rod is settled as discussed earlier.

d.

Cooling water is continuously supplied via the

P-under port and insert header.

(1)

Flow from plug type orifice in flange

follows passage between outer tube and

thermal sleeve to outer screen.

(2)

Cooling water is required to protect the

OBJ. V.B.18

graphitar seals from high reactor

temperatures.

(3)

Long exposures at high temperatures will

result in brittle, fast- wearing seals.

(4)

Drive temperature should be maintained

at <350°F and the cause should be

investigated if it exceeds this value.

(5)

Concern is that the high temperature

may be caused by a leaking scram

discharge valve.

(6)

This problem should be corrected as

soon as possible to prevent damage to

the valve.

e.

Scram function

(1)

There are two sources of water that can

OBJ. V.B/E.11,

be used to scram a drive: reactor water

V.D.10

and accumulator water.

(2)

Reactor water scram feature

(a)

Reactor water, if at high enough

pressure, is capable of scramming

More on required

the drive without any accumulator

amount of

assistance.

pressure to lift

drive and control

(b)

The over-piston area is opened to

rod later in LP.

the scram discharge header.

(

(2)

The primary effect is reduced 10 of the

inner tube just below the bottom of the

collet piston.

(a)

In serious overpressure situations,

this squeezes the inner tube

against the circumference of the

index tube.

(b)

The index tube is then held in the

insert overtravel position and often

cannot be withdrawn.

OPL171 .006

Revision 9

Page 35 of 60

(3)

Bulging of the index tube as described

above also occurs.

b.

Extensive procedural controls are specified to

prevent improper valving of the hydraulic

module.

c.

Particular caution should be observed during

the startup test program.

3.

Scram Capability

a.

Piston areas

(1)

Under-piston area equals 4.0 in2.

(2)

Over-piston area equals 2.8 in2.

b.

Normal scram forces

(1)

During a normal scram condition, the

over-piston area is opened to the scram

discharge volume which is initially at

atmospheric pressure.

(2)

Accumulator and/or reactor pressure is

simultaneously applied to the under-

piston area. The net initial force applied

to the drive (taking no credit for the

accumulator) can be calculated as

follows.

Fnet =(Forces Up) - (Forces Down)

(

Fnet = (Rx Pressure x Under-Piston Area) -

(Rx Pressure x Area of Index Tube

+ Weight of Blade + Friction)

Fnet =(1000 psig x 4.0 in2) - [1000 psig

x (4.0 in2 - 1.2 in2)] - 255 Ibs -

- 500 Ibs

Fnet = 4000 - 2800 - 255 - 500

OPL171.006

Revision 9

Page 36 of 60

Note: 4 in2

upward force -

1.2 in2

downward force

= 2.8 in2

Fnet = 445 Ibs

(Upward)

c.

Single failure proof - There is no single-mode

failure to the hydraulic system which would

prevent the drive from scramming .

d.

Accumulator versus reactor vessel pressure

scrams

(1 )

TP-9 represents a plot of 90 percent

scram times versus reactor pressure.

(a)

Reactor pressure only

(b)

Accumulator pressure only

(c)

Combined reactor and

accumulator pressure

TP-9

(2)

Scram times are measured for only the

first 90% of the rod insertion since the

buffer holes at the top end of the stroke

slow the drive.

(3)

Reactor-pressure-only scram

(a)

As can be seen from TP-9, the

drive cannot be scrammed with

reactor pressure ~ 400 psig.

(b)

The net initial upward force

available to scram the drive can

be calculated as follows.

OPL171.006

Revision 9

Page 38 of 60

(

e.

Average scram times (normal drive)

TP-9

(1)

Technical Specifications state that scram

times are to be obtained without reliance

on the CRD pumps.

(2)

Consequently, the charging water must

be valved out on the drive to be tested.

(3)

Maximum scram time for a typical drive

occurs at 800 psig reactor pressure.

(4)

This is why Technical Specifications

specify that scram times are to be taken

at 800 psig or greater reactor pressure.

f.

Abnormal scram conditions

(1)

Scram outlet valve failure to open

(2)

Drive will slowly scram on seal leakage

as long as accumulator charging water

pressure stays greater than reactor

pressure.

(3)

If the accumulator is not available, the

drive will not scram (this is a double

failure).

g.

Control Rods failure to Insert After Scram

Obj. V.D.11

(1)

This condition could be due to hydraulic

lock.

(2)

Procedure has operator close the

See 2-01-85 &2-

Withdraw Riser Isolation valve. Connect

EOI App-1 E for

drain hose to Withdraw Riser Vent Test

detailed

Connection on the affected HCU. Slowly

operations

open Withdraw Riser Vent. When inward

motion has stopped, close Withdraw

Self Check

Riser Vent.

Peer Check

(

(

28. RO 201006K4.09 OOl/MEM/T2G2/RWM//201006K4.09/3.2/3.2/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS

The Rod Worth Minimizer must be INITIALIZED to properly determine rod position and sequence.

Which ONE of the following describes how RWM System INITIALIZATION is accomplished?

A.

INITIALIZATION occurs automatically when the RWM is unbypassed.

B.

INITIALIZATION occurs automatically every 5 seconds while in the transition zone.

C.oI INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when the

RWM is unbypassed.

D.

INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when power

drops below the LPSP.

KIA Statement:

201006 RWM

K4.09 - Knowledge of ROD WORTH MINIMIZER SYSTEM (RWM) (PLANT SPECIF IC) design feature(s)

and/or interlocks which provide for the following : System initialization : P-Spec(Not-BWR6)

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific of

which plant condition would INITIALIZE the RWM.

References:

1/2/3-01-85, OPL 171.024

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. When RWM INITIALIZATION is required .

2. How RWM INITIALIZATION is accomplished.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because initialization is required when the RWM is unbypassed, but this

must be done manually.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM automatically initiates a "scanllatch" to determine the

correct latched rod group, but this is not the same as INITIALIZATION.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM must be manually INITIALIZED, but the RWM does

not require initialization because the LPSP is reached. THe RWM will automatically perform a

"scanllatch" at that point.

OPL171.024

Revision 13

Page 19 of 53

(

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

(2)

The MANUAL indicator light will then be Obj. V.B.6

lit and all error and alarm indications

that were on prior to bypass will be

blanked out on the RWM system

displays.

(3)

A manual bypass will also light the

RWM and PROGR indicator on the

RWM-COMP-PROGR-BUFF

pushbutton.

f.

SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton

switch/indicator

(1)

The SYSTEM INITIALIZE switch is

depressed to initialize the RWM

system.

(2)

Initialization must be performed

whenever the RWM has been taken off

line, as occurs whenever the RWM

program is aborted or manually

bypassed.

(3)

Therefore, following any program abort

or bypass, the SYSTEM INITIALIZE

switch must be depressed before the

program can be run again.

(4)

The SYSTEM INITIALIZE window

lights white while the switch is held

down.

g.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC switch/indicator

(1)

This switch can be pressed at any time

after the system has been initialized to

request that the system diagnostic

routine be performed.

(2)

The RWM program will thereupon be

initiated and will perform the routine,

which consists of applying and then

removing in sequence the insert and

withdraw blocks (nominal 10 second

frequency).

(3)

The operator can verify the operability

NOTE: Rod insert

of the rod block circuits by observing

and withdrawal

(

that the INSERT BLOCK and

permit lights will go

WITHDRAW BLOCK alarm lights come

off when block is

on and then go off as the blocks are

applied.

(

(

BFN

Control Rod Drive System

1-01-85

Unit 1

Rev. 0005

Paue 136 of 179

8.18

Reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer

[1 ]

VERIFY the following initial conditions are satisfied:

The Rod Worth Minimizer is available to be placed in

operation

D

Integrated Computer System (ICS) is available

D

The Shift Manager/Reactor Engineer has directed

reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer

D

[2]

REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.3.

D

[3]

VERIFY RWM SWITCH PANEL, 1-XS-85-9025 in NORMAL.

D

[4]

CHECK the Manual/Auto Bypass lights are extinguished.

D

[5]

DEPRESS AND HOLD INOP/RESET pushbutton.

D

[6]

CHECK all four lights (RWM/COMP/PROG/BUFF) are

illuminated.

D

[7]

RELEASE INOP/RESET pushbutton and CHECK all four

lights extinguished.

D

[8]

SIMULTANEOUSLY DEPRESS OUT OF

SEQUENCE/SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton and

INOP/RESET pushbutton to place the Rod Worth Minimizer in

service.

D

[9]

IF Rod Worth Minimizer will NOT initialize, THEN

DETERMINE alarms on RWM Display Screen and CORRECT

problems.

D

[10]

IF unable to correct problems and initialize RWM, THEN

NOTIFY Reactor Engineer.

D

(

BFN

Control Rod Drive System

1-01-85

Unit 1

Rev. 0005

Page 19 of 179

3.3

Rod Worth Minimizer (RWM) (continued)

N.

For group limits only, RWM recognizes the Nominal Limits only. The Nominal

Limit is the insert or withdraw limit for the group assigned by RWM. The

Alternate Limit is no longer recognized by the RWM as an Acceptable

Group Limit.

O.

During RWM latching, the latched group will be the highest numbered

group with 2 or less insert errors and having at least 1 rod withdrawn past its

insert limits.

1.

With Sequence Control ON, latching occurs as follows: (Normally, startups

will be performed with Sequence Control ON)

a.

RWM will latch down when all rods in the presently latched

group have been inserted to the group insert limit and a rod in the next

lower group is selected.

b.

RWM will latch up when a rod within the next higher group is selected,

provided that no more than two insert errors result.

2.

With Sequence Control OFF, latching occurs as follows:

a.

For non-repeating groups, latching occurs as described above, OR

b.

For repeating groups, latching occurs to the next setup or set down

based on rod movement as opposed to rod selection.

P.

Latching occurs at the following times:

1.

System initialization.

2.

Following a "System Diagnostic" request.

3.

When operator demands entry or termination of "Rod Test."

4.

When power drops below LPAP.

5.

When power drops below LPSP.

6.

Every five seconds in the transition zone.

7.

Following any full control rod scan when power is below LPAP.

8.

Upon demand by the Operator (Scan/Latch Request function).

9.

Following correction of insert or withdraw errors.

(

29. RO 202001K6.09 OOl/C/A/T2G2/68 - RECIRC/24/202001 K6.09//RO/SROI

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 3 is operating at 55% power with Reactor Feed Pump (RFP) "A" & "C" running and RFP "B"

idling.

Both Recirculation Pump speeds are 53%.

The "A" RFP trips, resulting in the following conditions:

Reactor Water level Abnormal alarm sealed in

Reactor Vessel Wtr Level Low Half Scram alarm sealed in

Indicated Reactor Water Level drops to _10" before RFP "B" is brought on line to reverse the level

trend and level is stabilized at 33".

Which ONE of the following describes the steady state condition of both Recirculation Pumps?

A.

Running at 53% speed

B.

Running at 45% speed

c.Y' Running at 28% speed

D.

Tripped on ATWS/RPT signal.

KIA Statement:

202001 Recirculation

K6.09 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the

RECIRCULATION SYSTEM: Reactor water level

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions and times to determine the effect of a change in reactor water level on the Recirculation

System.

References: 3-01-68, OPL 171.007, OPL171.012

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

(

l

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Did plant conditions exceed the Recirc Runback setpoint.

2. Which Runback is appropriate for the given conditions.

A is incorrect. Total Feedflow would drop below 19% with only one RFP running at 55% rated power,

thus initiating a Recirc Runback to 28%. This is plausible based on the initial power level being close

enough to create doubt on total feedflow resulting from the trip of one RFP.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because a Recirc Runback DID occur, but the 45% speed given in the

distractor is the typical speed the Recirc Pumps run at during startup , not following a RFP trip.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because ATWS/RPT signals are associated with low RPV level, however

the setpoint is -45 inches and level only lowered to -10 inches.

(

BFN

Reactor Recirculation System

3-01-68

Unit 3

Rev. 0066

Page 13 of 179

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)

10. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the temperature of the

coolant between the operating and idle Recirc loops are within 50°F of

each other. This 50°F delta T limit is based on stress analysis for reactor

nozzles, stress analysis for reactor recirculation components and piping,

and fuel thermal limits.

[GE Sll517 Supplement 1]

11. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the reactor is verified

outside of regions 1, 2 and 3 of the Unit 3 Power to Flow Map (ICS or

Station Reactor Engineering, 0-TI-248).

12. The temperature of the coolant between the dome and the idle Recirc loop

should be maintained within 75°F of each other. If this limit cannot be

maintained a plant cooldown should be initiated. Failure to maintain this

limit and NOT cooldown could result in hangers and/or shock suppressers

exceeding their maximum travel range.

[GE SIl251, 430 and 517]

M.

Recirc Pump controller limits are as follows:

1.

When any individual RFP flow is less than 19% and reactor water level is

below 27 inches, speed limit is set to 75%(-1130 RPM speed) and if speed

is greater than 75%(-1130 RPM speed), Recirc speed will run back to

75%(-1130 RPM speed).

2.

When total feed water flow is less than 19% (15 sec TD) or Recirc Pump

discharge valve is less than 90% open, speed limit is set to 28%

(-480 RPM speed) and if speed is greater than 28%(-480 RPM speed),

Recirc speed will run back to 28%(-480 RPM speed).

(

BFN

Reactor Recirculation System

3-01-68

Unit 3

Rev. 0066

Page 15 of 179

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)

R.

The power supplies to the MMR and DFR relays are listed below.

VFD3A

I&C BUS A (BKR 215)

ICS PNL 532 (BKR 30)

UNIT PFD (BKR 615)

VFD3B

I&C BUS B (BKR 315)

ICS PNL 532 (BKR 26)

UNIT PFD (BKR 616)

3-RLY-068-MMR3/A & DFR3/A

3-RLY-068-MMR2/A & DFR2/A

3-RLY-068-MMR1/A & DFR1/A

3-RLY-068-MMR3/B & DFR3/B

3-RLY-068-MMR2/B & DFR2/B

3-RLY-068-MMR1/B & DFR1/B

(

S.

A complete list of Recirc System trip functions is provided in Illustration 4. The

RPT breakers between the recirc drives and pump motors will open on any of

the following:

1.

Reactor dome Pressure ~ 1148 psig (ATWS/RPT). (Both pressure

switches in Logic A or both pressure switches in Logic B will cause RPT

breakers to trip both pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)

2.

Reactor Water Level s -45" (ATWS/RPT) . (Both level switches in Logic A

or both level switches in Level B will cause RPT breakers to trip both

pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)

3.

Turbine trip or load reject condition, when ~ 30% power by turbine first

stage pressure (EOC/RPT) .

1.

The ATWS/RPT A(B) logic to trip the RPT breakers is defeated if the

ATWS/RPT/ARI A(B) manual logic is armed using the arming collar on

Panel 3-9-5. B(A) logic would still be functional and trip the RPT breakers if the

setpoints are reached. If both manual push-buttons on 3-9-5 are armed,

ATWS/RPT automatic logic is totally defeated (no RPT breaker trip will occur if

the ATWS/RPT trip setpoints are reached). EOC/RPT logic and ATWS/ARI

logic will function without regard to the position of the arming collars.

ATWS/R PT/ARI logic can be reset 30 seconds after setpoints are reset.

(

(

30. RO 215001Al.Ol OOlIMEMlTIG2/TIPI121500IAl.Ol//RO/SROI

Which ONE of the following describes the procedural requirements in accordance with 2-01-94,

Traversing In-Core Probe System while running TIP traces?

A.

The TIP detector shall be withdrawn to the In-Shield position and the ball valve closed following

each TIP trace.

8.

Running a TIP trace while personnel are working inside the Drywell is prohibited.

C." The Radiation Protection Shift Supervisor is required to be notified prior to TIP System operation.

D.

The TIP Machine will automatically withdraw to the in-shield position, then the ball valve will

automatically close following a PCIS Group 6 isolation.

KIA Statement:

215001 Traversing In-core Probe

A1.01 - Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the

TRAVERSING IN-CORE PROBE controls including: Radiation levels: (Not-BWR1)

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to determine the

operating limitations of the TIP system with respect to high radiation .

References:

2-01-94 Precautions & Limitations

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. Limitations for running TIP traces with personnel in the Drywell.

2. Notification requirements prior to running TIPs.

3. Which PCIS Group will cause a TIP retraction and isolation.

4. Requirements for running multiple simultaneous TIP traces.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because that limitation is placed on TIP operation, but only when TIP

operation is no longer required. The TIP detector can be stored in the Indexer in-between traces using

the same TIP Machine for ALARA concerns.

8 is incorrect. This is plausible because specific permission and controls are required to allow this

condition, but it is allowable.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because the TIP response to a PCIS isolation is correct, but it is not a

Group 6 isolation.

(

BFN

Traversing Incore Probe System

2-01-94

Unit2

Rev. 0029

Page 7 of 26

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

A.

[NER/C] Verification of a digit in CORE LIMIT and DETECTOR POSITION

windows prior to or during TIP insertion ensures TIPs retain the ability to

determine its proper position. This will prevent malfunctions which could

damage the TIP detector.

[GE SIL-166]

B.

To prevent accidental exposure to personnel , immediately evacuate the area if

the TIP drive area radiation monitor alarms.

C.

[NER/C] Always observe READY light illuminated prior to inserting detector.

[GE

SIL-166]

D.

(NERlC] DO NOT move CHANNEL SELECT switch with detector inserted past

Indexer position (0001). The common channel interlock can be defeated in this

manner resulting in detector and equipment damage.

[GE SIL-092]

E.

(NERlC] Should detector fail to shift to slow speed when it enters the core, the

LOW switch should be turned on, switched to manual mode, and the detector

withdrawn.

[GE SIL-166]

F.

[NER/C] Length of time detector is left in core should be minimized to limit

activation of detector and cable.

[GE SIL-166]

G.

(NERlC] When TIP System operation is not desired, detectors should be retracted

and stored in chamber shield with ball valves closed .

[GE SIL-166] Storage of

detector in Indexer (0001) is allowed only for ALARA concerns and to prevent

unnecessary masking of multiple inputs to annunciator RX BLDG AREA

RADIATION HIGH 2-RA-90-1 D (2-XA-55-3A, Window 22).

. H.

[NER/C] Upon receipt of a PCIS signal (low reactor water level or high drywell

pressure), any detector inserted beyond its shield chamber should be verified to

automatically shift to reverse mode and begin withdrawal. Once in shield, ball

and purge valves close.

[GE SIL-166] Ball valve cannot be reopened until PCIS is

reset on Panel 2-9-4 and manual reset of TIP ISOLATION RESET pushbutton

2-HS-94-7D/S2 located on Panel 2-9-13.

I.

A detector should not be abruptly stopped from fast speed to off without first

switching to slow speed.

J.

[NER/C] Drive Control Units (DCU) should be monitored during withdrawal to

prevent any chamber shield withdrawal limit from being overrun. Detectors

should be stopped manually at shield limit if auto stop limit switch should fail

and verify ball valve closes.

[GE SIL-166]

K.

Only one TIP at a time should be operated when maintenance is being

performed in TIP drive area.

(

l

BFN

Traversing Incore Probe System

2-01-94

Unit2

Rev. 0029

Page 8 of 26

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)

L.

[NRC/CJ DO NOT operate TIPswith personnel inside TIP Room or in vicinity of

TIP tubing and Indexers in Drywell. Requirement may be waived with approval

of Shift Manager and site RADCON manager or designee. In this instance,

RADCON is required to establish such controls as are necessary to prevent

access to TIP tubing and Indexer areas to preclude unnecessary exposure to

personnel working in Drywell. RADCON Field Operations Shift Supervisor is

required to be notified prior to operation of TIP System.

[NRC InformationNotice88-063,

Supplement2J

M.

No channel should be indexed to common channel 10 unless all other channels

are not indexed to channel 10 and all their READY lights are illuminated.

N.

[NERlC] DO NOT turn MODE switch to OFF on Drive Control Unit if detector is

outside shield chamber unless personnel safety requires it. [GE SIL-166J This

removes power preventing automatic withdrawal on PCIS signal and causing

ball valves to close on cable or detector. Tip Ball Valves CANNOT fully close

and shear valves may have to be actuated.

O.

CHANNEL SELECT switches on Drive Control Units should always be rotated

in clockwise direction when selecting channels.

P.

Connector on shear valve indicator circuit should not be removed while testing

shear valve explosive charges or performing shear valve maintenance with

detector inserted. This will cause an automatic detector withdrawal.

Q .

Continuous voice communication should be maintained between TIP operator

or maintenance personnel in control room and drive mechanism area while

maintenance is being performed and TIP detector driving is necessary.

R.

Each applicable ball valve should be opened prior to operating that TIP

machine.

S.

TIP Drive Mechanisms and Indexers should have continuous purge supply

unless required to be removed from service for maintenance.

T.

During outages when containment is deinerted for personnel access, TIP

Indexer purge supply should be transferred from nitrogen to Control Air for

personnel safety.

U.

Detector damage is possible if TIP ball valve is left open, or is opened during

DRYWELL PRESSURE TEST. (GE SIL-166)

(

(

31. RO 216000Kl.l O00l/MEM/T2G2/PR.INSTRJ9/216000Kl.lO//RO/SRO/

Which ONE of the following indicates how raising recirculation flow affects the Emergency System Range

indicators (3-58A -58B) and Narrow Range Indicators (e.g., L1-3-53) on Panel 9-5?

A.

No effect on Emergency System Range; Narrow Range will indicate higher.

B.

Emergency System Range will indicate higher; Narrow Range will not be affected.

C.

Both Emergency System Range and Narrow Range will indicate lower.

D.oI Emergency System Range will indicate lower and Narrow Range will not be affected.

KIA Statement:

216000 Nuclear Boiler Inst

K1.10 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between NUCLEAR

BOILER INSTRUMENTATION and the following : Recirculation flow control system

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of the effect of changes in Recirculation flow on reactor water level instrumentation.

References:

OPL171.003

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the effect of raising Recirc flow on

Normal Range and Emergency Systems Range level instrumentation.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments may read slightly higher at colder

conditions, but this does NOT apply to Recirc flow changes.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments are not effected by Recirc Flow

changes, but Emergency System Range isntruments will read lower.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because Emergency System Range instruments will read lower, but the

Narrow Range instruments will not.

D is correct.

(

d.

Four ranges of level indication

OPL 171.003

Revision 17

Page 20 of 54

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

Normal Control Range (Narrow Range)

(1)

(a)

oto +60 inch range covering the

normal operating range (analog) with

+60" up to +70" digital and 0" down to

- 10" digital readings.

Obj. V.B.5

Obj. V.B.6

TP-3 shows only

analog scale

(b)

Referenced to instrument zero

(c)

Four of these instruments are

used by Feedwater Level Control

System (FWLCS). The level

signal utilized by the FWLCS is

not directed through the Analog

Trip System.

i.

Temperature

compensated by a

pressure signal

Obj. V.B.11.

Obj. V.B.13.

(

ii.

Most accurate level

indication available to the

operator

iii.

Calibrated for normal

operating pressure and

temperature

(d)

These indicators and a recorder

point (average of the four) are

located on Panel 9-5.

NOTE: An air bubble or leak in

the reference leg can cause

inaccurate readings in a non-

conservative direction resulting in

a mismatch between level

indicators.

This problem is particularly

prevalent after extended outages

when starting up from cold

shutdown conditions and at low

reactor pressures.

LER 85-006-02

(See LP Folder)

(Section X.C.1.j.

provides more

detail)

(

(e)

Four other narrow range

instruments are located in the

control room, two above the

FWLCS level indicators on panel 9-5 (3-208A & D), one above

HPCI (3-208B)and one above

RCIC (3-208C)on panel 9-3.

OPL171 .003

Revision 17

Page 21 of 54

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

Associated with

RFPT/Main Turbine

and HPCIIRCIC trip

instruments

(2)

Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) 2 Analog meters

and 2 Digital meters .

(a)

-155 to +60 inches range

covering normal operating range

and down to the lower instrument

nozzle return

(b)

Referenced to instrument zero

(c)

Four MCR indicators on Panel 9-

5 monitor this range of level

indication.

(d)

Calibrated for normal operating

pressure and temperature

(e)

The level signal utilized by the

Wide Range instruments have

safety related functions and are

directed through the Analog Trip

System.

(f)

Level indication for this range is

Obj. V.B.12.

also provided on the Backup

Control Panel (25-32).

(3)

Shutdown Vessel Flood Range (Flood-up

Range)

(a)

oto +400 inches range covering

upper portion of reactor vessel

(b)

Referenced to instrument zero

Calibrated for cold conditions

<<212°F, 0 psig)

(c)

Provides level indication during

vessel flooding or cool down.

(

Transient flashing effects can cause

indicated level to oscillate or be

erratic. As the reference leg refills,

the indicated level approaches a

more accurate water level indication .

The RVLlS mod decreases the time

necessary for this refill to occur

j.

Normal Control Range (Narrow Range) and

Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) Level

Discrepancies

(1)

Narrow Range level instrumentation is

calibrated to be most accurate at rated

temperature and pressure (particularly

the instruments for FWLCS, since they

are temperature compensated). At cold

conditions the non-FWLCS instruments

read high (not temperature

compensated).

(2)

Wide Range instruments are also

calibrated for rated temperature and

pressure

OPL171.003

Revision 17

Page 32 of 54

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

(a)

The indicated level on the Wide

Range (9-5) is also affected by

changes in the subcooling of

recirculation water and the

amount of flow at the lower

(variable leg) tap.

Obj. V.B.15

(b)

At rated conditions with

minimum recirculation flow the

Wide Range instruments are

accurate. As recirculation flow is

increased past the lower tap it

has a significant velocity head

and some friction loss which

reduces the pressure on the

variable leg to the differential

pressure instrument, resulting in

an indicated level lower than

actual. This could be as much

as 10-15 inches error when at

rated flow and power.

(c)

Due to calibration for rated

conditions and no density

compensation at cold conditions

these instruments read high.

(

32. RO 219000K2.02 00l/C/A/T2G2/0I-74//219000K2.02//RO/SRO/NEW 10/16/07

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit-2 is at 100% rated power with RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling mode to support

a HPCI Full Flow test surveillance.

Unit-1 experiences a LOCA which results in a CAS signal initiation on Unit-1.

Which ONE of the following describes the current status of Unit-2 RHR system and what actions must be

taken to restore Suppression Pool Cooling on Unit-2?

A.

2A and 2C RHR Pumps are tripped. 28 and 2D pumps are unaffected . No additional action is

required.

B. 28 and 2D RHR Pumps are tripped. 2A and 2C pumps are unaffected. Place RHR Loop I in

Suppression Pool Cooling immediately.

c. All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling

immediately.

D~ All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling after a 60

second time delay.

KIA Statement:

219000 RHR/LPCI: Torus/Pool Cooling Mode

K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Pumps

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions and times to determine which RHR pumps can be used for Suppression Pool Cooling.

References: 2-01-74, OPL 171.044

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Response of Unit-2 RHR pumps due to a Unit 1 CAS initition.

2. Recognize the difference between a Single Unit CAS and Simultaneous Unit CAS.

3. Recognize that Preferred and Non-preferred ECCS pumps do NOT apply with the given conditions.

A is incorrect. This is plausible based on RHR Loop II being the Preferred pumps for Unit-2.

B is incorrect. This is plausible if taken from the perspective of Unit 1 operation, not Unit 2 operation.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because all four RHR pumps on Unit 2 will trip, but they are locked out

from manual start for 60 seconds based on D/G and/or Shutdown Board loading concerns.

D is correct.

(

(

BFN

Residual Heat Removal System

2-01-74

Unit2

Rev. 0133

Page 331 of 367

Appendix A

(Page 2 of 7)

Unit 1 & 2 Core Spray/RHR Logic Discussion

2.2

ECCS Preferred Pump Logic

Concurrent Accident Signals On Unit 1 and Unit 2

With normal power available, the starting and running of RHR pumps on a 4KV

Shutdown Board already loaded by the opposite unit's Core Spray, RHR pumps, and

RHRSW pumps could overload the affected 4KV Shutdown Boards and trip the

normal feeder breaker. This would result in a temporary loss of power to the

affected 4KV Shutdown Boards while the boards are being transferred to their

diesels. To prevent this undesirable transient, Unit 2 RHR Pumps 2A and 2C are

load shed on a Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed

on a Unit 2 accident signal. Unit 2 Core Spray Pumps 2A and 2C are load shed on a

Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Core Spray Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed on

a Unit 2 accident signal. This makes the Preferred ECCS pumps Unit 1 Division I

Core Spray and RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 2 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.

Conversely, the Non-preferred ECCS pumps are Unit 1 Division 2 Core Spray and

RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 1 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.

The preferred and non-preferred ECCS pumps are as follows:

UNIT 1 & 2

PREFERRED ECCS Pumps

CS1A,CS1C,RHR1A,RHR1C

CS 2B, CS 20, RHR 2B, RHR 20

NON-PREFERRED ECCS Pumps

CS 1B, CS 10, RHR 1B, RHR 10

CS2~CS2C,RHR2A,RHR2C

UNIT3

Unit 3 does not have ECCS Preferred/Non-Preferred Pump Logic.

Accident Signal On One Unit

With an accident on one unit, ECCS Preferred pump logic trips all running RHR and

Core Spray pumps on the non-accident unit.

(

OPL171.044

Revision 15

Page 50 of 159

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

Note:

Presently Unit 1 Accident signal will not affect Unit 2 due to DCN H2735A that lifted wires

from relays. Unit 2 will still affect Unit 1.

However, the following represents modifications

to the inter-tie logic as it will be upon Unit 1 recovery.

(

f.

(1)

Unit 1 Preferred RHR pumps are 1A and 1C

(2)

Unit 2 Preferred RHR pumps are 28 and 2D

(3)

Unit 2 initiation logic is as follows:Div 1 RHR

logic initiates Div 1 pumps ( A and C), and Div

2 logic initiates Div 2 pumps (B and D)

Accident Signal

(1)

LOCA signals are divided into two separate

signals, one referred to as a Pre Accident

Signal (PAS) and the other referred to as a

Common Accident Signal (CAS).

  • PAS

-122" Rx water level (Level 1)

OR

2.45 psig DW pressure

-122" Rx water level (Level 1)

OR

2.45 psig DW pressure AND <450

psig Rx pressure

(2)

If a unit receives an accident signal, then all

its respective RHR and Core Spray pumps

will sequence on based upon power source to

the SD Boards.

(3)

All RHR and Core Spray pumps on the non-

affected unit will trip (if running) and will be

blocked from manual starting for 60 seconds.

Obj. V.B.13.

Obj. V.C.3

Obj. V.C.7

Obj. V.D.6

Obj. V.E.II

Obj. V.B.13.

Obj. V.C.3

Obj. V.C.7

Obj. V.D.6

Obj. V.E.II

Note:

It should be clear

that the only

difference

between the two

signals is the

inclusion of Rx

pressure in the

CAS signal. The

PAS signal is an

anticipatory signal

that allows the

DG's to start on

rising OW

pressure and be

ready should a

CAS be received.

OPL171.044

Revision 15

Page 51 of 159

(

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

(4)

After 60 seconds all RHR pumps on the non-

Operator diligence

affected unit may be manually started.

required to

(5)

The non-preferred pumps on the non-

prevent

overloading SO

affected unit are also prevented from

boards/DG's

automatically starting until the affected unit's

accident signal is clear.

(6)

The preferred pumps on the non-affected

unit are locked out from automatically starting

until the affected unit accident signal is clear

OR the non-affected unit receives an

accident signal.

g.

4KV Shutdown Board Load Shed

Obj. V.C .B.

(1)

A stripping of motor loads on the 4KV boards

occurs when the board experiences an

undervoltage condition. This is referred to as a

4KV Load Shed. This shed prepares the board

for the DG ensuring the DG will tie on to the

bus unloaded and without faults.

(2)

The Load Shed occurs when an undervoltage

is experienced on the board i.e. or if the Diesel

were tied to the board (only source) and one of

the units experienced an accident signal which

trips the Diesel output breaker.

(3)

Then, when the Diesel output breaker

interlocks are satisfied, the DG output breaker

would close and, if an initiation signal is

present (CAS) the RHR, CS, and RHRSW

pumps would sequence on

(4)

Following an initiation of a Common Accident

Signal (which trips the diesel breaker), if a

subsequent accident signal is received from

another unit, a second diesel breaker trip on a

"unit priority" basis is provided to ensure that

the Shutdown boards are stripped prior to

starting the RHR pumps and other ECCS

loads

(5)

When an accident signal trip of the diesel

Occurs due to

breakers is initiated from one unit (CASA or

actuation of the

(

CASB), subsequent CAS trips of all eight

diesel breaker

diesel breakers are blocked.

TSCRN relay

(

33. RO 226001A4.I2 OOlIMEM/T2G2/PC/P//226001A4.12/3.8/3.9/RO/SRO/

Given the following plant conditions:

A pipe break inside containment results in the below parameters:

- Drywell pressure is 20 psig

- Drywell temperature is 210°F

- Suppression chamber pressure is 18 psig.

- Suppression chamber temperature is 155°F.

- Suppression pool level is +2 inches

- Reactor water level is +30 inches

Which ONE list of parameters below must ALWAYS be addressed to determine when it is appropriate to

spray the drywell?

A.

-Suppression Chamber temperature

-Drywell pressure

-Drywell temperature

B.

-Suppression Chamber pressure

-Drywell temperature

-Suppression Pool level

C." -Drywell pressure

-Drywell temperature

-Reactor water level

D.

-Reactor water level

-Suppression Chamber temperature

-Drywell pressure

KIA Statement:

226001 RHR/LPCI: CTMT Spray Mode

A4.12 - Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: ContainmenUdrywell pressure

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of which containment parameters are used to determine when Containmerit Sprays can be

used.

References: 1/2/3-EOI-2 Flowchart

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

(

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Orywell temperature and pressure are always required to ensure Curve 5 limits are not exceeded.

2. RPV level is always required to verify adequate core cooling is assured prior to diverting RHR flow

for Orywell sprays.

3. Suppression Pool level is always required to verify Suppression Chamber to Orywell vacuum breakers

are uncovered.

4. Suppression Chamber pressure is ONLY required when initiating Orywell Sprays from flowpath PC/Po

5. Suppression Chamber temperature is NOT required to initiate Orywell Sprays.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and press are required , but SC temp is not.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and SP level are required , but SC press is ONLY

required when initiating OW Sprays using PC/Po

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because RPV level and OW press are required, but SC temp is not.

WHEN

SUPPR CHMBR PRESS EXCEEDS 12 PSIG,

THEN

CONnNUE INTHISPROCEDURE

L

-_..._....----_.....__.__.._---------_...., ..

"

~'.

PClP-7

L

SHUT DOWNRECIRC PUfA'PS ANDOWBLOWERS

  1. 2

PUMP NPSH AND VORTEX m"TS

INITlAm r:JN SPRAYS USING W:lL:!PUMPSWIREQUJRED

ro ASSUREAIEQUATE OORE COOLING BY CON11NUOUS

INJ(APPX 178)

L

L

L

L

!:!

~

"

,p'

0"

..,J~"~

L

SHUT DOWN RSCIRC i'IIllWS RJO r:1"BLO'/IB'tS

L

L

L

(

34. RO 234000G2.4.50 OO l/C/NTIG2///234000G2.4.50/IRO/SRO/

Given the following plant conditions:

Fuel movement is in progress for channel changeout activities in the Fuel Prep Machine.

Gas bubbles are visible coming from the de-channeled bundle.

An Area Radiation Monitor adjacent to the SFSP begins alarming.

Which ONE of the following describes the action (s) to take?

Immediately STOP fuel handling, then

_

A.

notify RADCON to monitor & evaluate radiation levels.

B."

evacuate non-essential personnel from the RFF.

C.

evacuate ALL personnel from the RFF.

D.

obtain Reactor Engineering Supervisor's recommendation for movement and sipping of the

damaged fuel assembly.

KIA Statement:

234000 Fuel Handling Equipment

2.4.50 - Emergency Procedures / Plan Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls

identified in the alarm response manual

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the corrective actions involving Fuel Handling equipment under emergency

conditions.

References:

1/2/3-AOI-79-1 & 79-2, 1/2/3-ARP-9-3A (W1)

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

(

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analvsis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. Whether indications are consistent with fuel damage or inadvertant criticality.

2. Based on the answer to Item 1 above, enter the appropriate AOI.

3. Immediate Operator Actions for the selected procedure, AOI-70-1.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because RADCON notification is a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,

however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.

B is correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because evacuation of ALL personnel is an IMMEDIATE action in

AOI-70-2 , however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action in the appropriate AOI.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because RE recommendations are a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,

however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.

BFN

Panel 9-3

2-ARP-9-3A

(

Unit2

2-XA-55-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 4 of 50

FUEL POOL

SensorlTrip Point:

FLOOR AREA

RADIATION HIGH

RI-90-1B

RI-90-2B

For setpoints

2-RA-90-1A

RI-90-3B

REFER TO 2-SIMI-90B.

11

(Page 1 of 1)

Sensor

RE-90-1B

EI664'

R-11 P-L1NE

Location:

RE-90-2B

E1664'

R-10 U-L1NE

RE-90-3B

E1639'

R-10 Q-L1NE

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Operator

Action:

References:

A. Change in general radiation levels.

B. Refueling accident.

C. Sensor malfunction.

None

A.

CHECK 2-RI-90-1A, 2-RI-90-2A and 2-RI-90-3A on Panel 2-9-11.

B. NOTIFY refuel floor personnel.

C. IF Dry Cask loading/unloading activities are in progress, THEN

NOTIFY Cask Supervisor.

D. IF airborne levels rise by 100 DAC AND RADCON confirms, THEN

REFER TO EPIP-1.

E. REFER TO 2-AOI-79-1 or 2-AOI-79-2 as applicable.

F. IF this alarm is not valid, THEN REFER TO 0-01-55.

G. IF this alarm is valid, THEN

MONITOR the other parameters that input to it frequently. These

other parameters will be masked from alarming while this alarm is

sealed in.

H. ENTER 2-EOI-3 Flowchart.

0-47E600-13

2-47E610-90-1

2-45E620-3

GE 730E356 Series, TVA Calc NDQ00902005001/EDC63693

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

(

BFN

Fuel Damage During Refueling

2-AOI-79-1

Unit 2

Rev. 0017

Page 3 of7

1.0

PURPOSE

This instruction provides the symptoms, automatic actions and operator actions for a

fuel damage accident.

2.0

SYMPTOMS

A.

Possible annunciators in alarm:

1.

FUEL POOL FLOOR AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 1).

2.

AIR PARTICULATE MONITOR RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,

window 2).

3.

RX BLDG, TURB BLDG, RF ZONE EXH RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,

window 4).

4.

REACTOR ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 21).

5.

RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 22).

6.

REFUELING ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,

window 34).

B.

Gas bubbles visible, in the Spent Fuel Storage Pool and/or Reactor Cavity,

attributed to physical fuel damage.

C.

Known dropped or physically damaged fuel bundle.

D.

Portable CAM in alarm.

E.

Radiation level on the Refuel Floor is greater than 25 mr/hr and cause is

unknown.

BFN

Fuel Damage During Refueling

2-AOI-79-1

Unit2

Rev. 0017

Page 5 of 7

4.0

OPERATOR ACTIONS

4.1

Immediate Actions

[1]

STOP all fuel handling.

[2]

EVACUATE all non-essential personnel from Refuel Floor.

4.2

Subsequent Actions

CAUTION

o

o

The release of iodine is of major concern. If gas bubbles are identified at any time, Iodine

release should be assumed until RADCON determines otherwise.

[1]

VERIFY secondary containment is intact.

(REFER TO Tech Spec 3.6.4.1)

[2]

IF any EOI entry condition is met, THEN

ENTER the appropriate EOI(s).

[3]

VERIFY automatic actions.

[4]

NOTIFY RADCON to perform the following:

n

o

o

EVALUATE the radiation levels.

0

MAKE recommendation for personnel access.

0

MONITOR around the Reactor Building Equipment Hatch,

at levels below the Refuel Floor, for possible spread of the

release.

0

[5]

REFER TO EPIP-1 for proper notification.

o

(

(

BFN

Fuel Damage During Refueling

2-AOI-79-1

Unit 2

Rev. 0017

Page 6 of 7

4.2

Subsequent Actions (continued)

[6]

MONITOR radiation levels, for the affected areas, using the

following radiation recorders and indicators:

A.

2-RR-90-1 (points 1 and 2), 2-MON-90-50 (Address 11),

2-RR-90-142 and 2-RR-90-140 (Panel 2-9-2) .

0

B.

2-RM-90-142, 2-RM-90-140, 2-RM-90-143

and 2-RM-90-141 Detectors A and B (Panel 2-9-10).

0

C.

2-RI-90-1A and 2-RI-90-2A (Panel 2-9-11).

0

D.

0-CONS-90-362A (Address 09, 10, 08) for Unit 1, 2,

3-RM-90-250, respectively (Panel 1-9-44).

0

[7]

IF possible, MONITOR portable CAMs &ARMs.

[8]

REQUEST Chemistry to perform 0-SI-4.8.8.2-1 to determine if

iodine concentration has risen.

0

[9]

NOTIFY Reactor Engineering Supervisor, or his designee, and

OBTAIN recommendation for movement and sipping of the

damaged fuel assembly.

0

[10]

OBTAIN Plant Managers approval prior to resuming any fuel

transfer operations.

0

[11]

WHEN condition has cleared AND if required, THEN

RETURN ventilation systems, including SGTS, to normal.

REFER TO 2-01-30A, 2-01-30B, 0-01-30F, 0-01-31,

and 0-01-65.

0

(

BFN

Inadvertent Criticality During Incore

2-AOI-79-2

Unit 2

Fuel Movements

Rev. 0013

Page 5 of 8

4.0

OPERATOR ACTIONS

4.1

Immediate Actions

[1 ]

IF unexpected criticality is observed following control rod

withdrawal, THEN

REINSERT the control rod.

0

[2]

IF all control rods CANNOT be fully inserted, THEN

MANUALLY SCRAM the reactor.

0

[3]

IF unexpected criticality is observed following the insertion of a

fuel assembly, THEN

PERFORM the following:

0

[3.1]

VERIFY fuel grapple latched onto the fuel assembly

handle AND immediately REMOVE the fuel assembly

from the reactor core.

0

[3.2]

IF the reactor can be determined to be subcritical AND

no radiological hazard is apparent, THEN

PLACE the fuel assembly in a spent fuel storage pool

location with the least possible number of surrounding

fuel assemblies, leaving the fuel grapple latched to the

fuel assembly handle.

0

[3.3]

IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical

OR adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN

TRAVERSE the refueling bridge and fuel assembly

away from the reactor core, preferably to the area of the

cattle chute, AND CONTINUE at Step 4.1[4].

0

[4]

IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical OR

adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN

EVACUATE the refuel floor.

0

(

35. RO 245000K6.04 OOI/C/A/TIG2/0I-35//245000K6.04/fRO/SRO/Il/28/07 RMS

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 2 is operating at 100% power.

Main Generator is at 1150 MWe.

The Chattanooga Load Coordinator requires a 0.95 lagging power factor.

Generator hydrogen pressure is 65 psig.

Which ONE of the following describes the required action and reason if Generator hydrogen pressure

drops to 45 psig?

REFERENCE PROVIDED

A.

Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Pole slippage

will not occur at this power factor.

B~ Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Sufficient cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen

pressure.

C.

Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Pole slippage will not occur at this generator load.

D. Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Sufficient

cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen pressure.

KJA Statement:

245000 Main Turbine Gen. / Aux .

K6.04 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the MAIN TURBINE

GENERATOR AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS : Hydrogen cooling

KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the effect of a loss of hydrogen cooling on Main Generator operation.

Reference Provided: Generator Capability Curve without axis labeled

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requi res mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: Generator Capability Curve without the axis labeled.

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Current operating point on the Generator Capability Curve based on given condiions.

2. Recognize that pole slippage is only a concern when operating with a significant leading power factor.

3. Recognize that pole slippage is a result of under excitation, not excessive generator load.

4. Recognize that generator hydrogen pressure is directly related to cooling capability.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the

generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. However, pole slippage is not a

concern at a unity power factor.

B is correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because generator load is properly reduced, but the basis for the

reduction is not related to slipping poles.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the

generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. In addition, insufficient hydrogen

pressure exists at the current generator load even wih a power factor of unity.